[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2002096714A1 - Display for moving body - Google Patents

Display for moving body Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2002096714A1
WO2002096714A1 PCT/JP2001/004434 JP0104434W WO02096714A1 WO 2002096714 A1 WO2002096714 A1 WO 2002096714A1 JP 0104434 W JP0104434 W JP 0104434W WO 02096714 A1 WO02096714 A1 WO 02096714A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
display
unit
moving body
image
seat
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/JP2001/004434
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
Toyoaki Kitano
Masahiro Ieda
Osamu Kono
Yasuhisa Nakamura
Shimon Okada
Kei Kasuga
Shinichi Kato
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Mitsubishi Electric Corp
Original Assignee
Mitsubishi Electric Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Mitsubishi Electric Corp filed Critical Mitsubishi Electric Corp
Priority to JP2002520799A priority Critical patent/JP4232462B2/en
Priority to PCT/JP2001/004434 priority patent/WO2002096714A1/en
Publication of WO2002096714A1 publication Critical patent/WO2002096714A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R1/00Optical viewing arrangements; Real-time viewing arrangements for drivers or passengers using optical image capturing systems, e.g. cameras or video systems specially adapted for use in or on vehicles
    • B60R1/20Real-time viewing arrangements for drivers or passengers using optical image capturing systems, e.g. cameras or video systems specially adapted for use in or on vehicles
    • B60R1/22Real-time viewing arrangements for drivers or passengers using optical image capturing systems, e.g. cameras or video systems specially adapted for use in or on vehicles for viewing an area outside the vehicle, e.g. the exterior of the vehicle
    • B60R1/23Real-time viewing arrangements for drivers or passengers using optical image capturing systems, e.g. cameras or video systems specially adapted for use in or on vehicles for viewing an area outside the vehicle, e.g. the exterior of the vehicle with a predetermined field of view
    • B60R1/26Real-time viewing arrangements for drivers or passengers using optical image capturing systems, e.g. cameras or video systems specially adapted for use in or on vehicles for viewing an area outside the vehicle, e.g. the exterior of the vehicle with a predetermined field of view to the rear of the vehicle
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R11/02Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for for radio sets, television sets, telephones, or the like; Arrangement of controls thereof
    • B60R11/0229Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for for radio sets, television sets, telephones, or the like; Arrangement of controls thereof for displays, e.g. cathodic tubes
    • B60R11/0235Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for for radio sets, television sets, telephones, or the like; Arrangement of controls thereof for displays, e.g. cathodic tubes of flat type, e.g. LCD
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R11/02Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for for radio sets, television sets, telephones, or the like; Arrangement of controls thereof
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R11/02Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for for radio sets, television sets, telephones, or the like; Arrangement of controls thereof
    • B60R11/0211Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for for radio sets, television sets, telephones, or the like; Arrangement of controls thereof for record carriers apparatus, e.g. video recorders, tape players or CD players
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R11/04Mounting of cameras operative during drive; Arrangement of controls thereof relative to the vehicle
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R11/02Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for for radio sets, television sets, telephones, or the like; Arrangement of controls thereof
    • B60R11/0264Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for for radio sets, television sets, telephones, or the like; Arrangement of controls thereof for control means
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R2011/0001Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by position
    • B60R2011/0003Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by position inside the vehicle
    • B60R2011/0007Mid-console
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R2011/0001Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by position
    • B60R2011/0003Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by position inside the vehicle
    • B60R2011/0028Ceiling, e.g. roof rails
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R2011/0001Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by position
    • B60R2011/0003Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by position inside the vehicle
    • B60R2011/0029Floor, e.g. side sills, fire wall
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R2011/0001Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by position
    • B60R2011/0003Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by position inside the vehicle
    • B60R2011/0033Rear-view mirrors
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R2011/0042Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by mounting means
    • B60R2011/008Adjustable or movable supports
    • B60R2011/0082Adjustable or movable supports collapsible, e.g. for storing after use
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R2011/0042Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by mounting means
    • B60R2011/008Adjustable or movable supports
    • B60R2011/0084Adjustable or movable supports with adjustment by linear movement in their operational position
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R2011/0042Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by mounting means
    • B60R2011/008Adjustable or movable supports
    • B60R2011/0085Adjustable or movable supports with adjustment by rotation in their operational position
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R11/00Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for
    • B60R2011/0042Arrangements for holding or mounting articles, not otherwise provided for characterised by mounting means
    • B60R2011/008Adjustable or movable supports
    • B60R2011/0092Adjustable or movable supports with motorization
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B60VEHICLES IN GENERAL
    • B60RVEHICLES, VEHICLE FITTINGS, OR VEHICLE PARTS, NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • B60R2300/00Details of viewing arrangements using cameras and displays, specially adapted for use in a vehicle
    • B60R2300/80Details of viewing arrangements using cameras and displays, specially adapted for use in a vehicle characterised by the intended use of the viewing arrangement
    • B60R2300/8066Details of viewing arrangements using cameras and displays, specially adapted for use in a vehicle characterised by the intended use of the viewing arrangement for monitoring rearward traffic

Definitions

  • the present invention is mounted on a moving body such as an automobile. For example, when displaying with a display means such as a rearview mirror or the like, when the rear view is reduced, the imaging means provided in the moving body captures an image.
  • the present invention relates to a mobile display device configured to display information on display means. Background art
  • FIG. 46 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a cabin of a conventional automobile.
  • 1 is an instrument panel provided at a front portion of a vehicle interior, and 2 is a radio receiver provided at a central portion 1a of an instrument panel 1.
  • Machine, cassette deck player, audio for CD player, etc., 3 is a dash board provided at the upper center of the instrument panel 1
  • 4 is a steering wheel provided on the right side of the instrument panel 1
  • 5 Is a front seat, and a driver's seat 5a and a passenger seat 5b are provided in the front seat 5 side by side.
  • Reference numeral 6 denotes a center console box installed between the driver's seat 5a and the passenger's seat 5b.
  • the audio 2 is configured to be installed at the center 1 a of the instrument panel 1.
  • navigation devices have begun to spread, and a navigation device body (not shown) has been installed under front seats such as a driver's seat and a passenger seat.
  • a display for displaying the map information output from the navigation device is installed near the center of the instrument panel 1, or the installation space for the audio is reduced, and the display is placed above the center of the instrument panel 1.
  • Installation that is, buried in the dashboard 3 and instruments indicating the state of the braking system installed on the driver's seat side of the instrument panel 1 are installed on the instrument panel 1.
  • the display unit is installed above the central part of the instrument panel 1, that is, buried in the dashboard 3, or above the driver's seat 5a or the passenger seat 5b.
  • a display unit is provided on a headrest (head support unit) via a support unit.
  • a monitor is fixed around the ceiling between the front and rear seats so that passengers in the rear can use the monitor to display TV, video, DVD, and other images. Some have done it.
  • Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-2977391 discloses that a switch such as an audio device or an air conditioner, which is conventionally installed in the center of the instrument panel 1, is placed in a driver's seat. What is installed on the console 6 between the passenger seat and the passenger seat is described.
  • Fig. 47 is a main part configuration diagram showing this main part.
  • reference numeral 1 denotes an instrument panel provided at the front of the passenger compartment
  • 3 denotes a dash board provided at an upper center of the instrument panel 1
  • 4 denotes a right side of the instrument panel 1.
  • the steering wheel 5 is a front seat, and the front seat 5 is provided with a driver's seat 5a and a passenger seat 5b side by side.
  • Reference numeral 6 denotes a cell installed between the driver's seat 5a and the passenger's seat 5b.
  • 7 is a gear change lever provided at the lower center of the instrument panel 1
  • 8 is a display provided at the upper center of the instrument panel 1.
  • the center console box 6 is provided with a lid 6a, and a storage section opened and closed by the lid 6a is formed inside the center console box 6.
  • a switch mounting portion 9 formed in a concave shape is provided in a part of the front of the center console box 6, and a remote control unit 10 is detachably fitted to the switch mounting portion 9. It is configured to: With this configuration, a passenger sitting in a driver's seat or a passenger seat of a car can easily perform a switch operation in a normal sitting posture.
  • FIG. 49 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of this device
  • FIG. 50 is a television receiver. It is sectional drawing of the state accommodated in the transport case.
  • reference numeral 21 denotes a display unit of a television receiver disposed on one side of a storage case 25 (described later), 22 denotes a path as a moving body, and 23 denotes a bus 2 2 is a rail provided at the approximate center of the ceiling of the bus 22, 25 is a transport case suspended movably on the rail 24, and 26 is a rail 2.
  • 4 is a roller section on which a transfer case 25 is slidably supported.
  • the transport case containing passenger service equipment such as a television receiver or articles such as passenger food and drink can easily move in the vehicle.
  • passenger service equipment such as a television receiver or articles
  • passenger food and drink can easily move in the vehicle.
  • Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-78693 discloses a vehicle monitoring device in which a monitor is provided inside a room mirror body of an automobile, and FIG. 51 shows a main configuration of this device.
  • FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view shown in FIG. 52.
  • FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of a main part showing a cross section of a main part configuration
  • FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of display on the main part.
  • the rearview mirror body 30 is installed on the ceiling surface of the cabin in front of the driver's seat of the vehicle body. It has the function of a pack mirror that captures the rear of the vehicle body and the function of a rear monitor of a rear imaging camera that captures the rear of the vehicle body.
  • the structure is as follows: housing 31, monitor 32, half mirror 33
  • the monitor 32 is powered on and reverses by gear change, the display shown in Fig. 53 appears on the monitor 32. Done.
  • Fig. 53 the screen is divided into two screens on the left and right, the rear image taken with the camera is displayed on the right, and notes are displayed on the left.
  • a rearview mirror (room mirror) is mounted on the ceiling near the driver's seat, and when the driver checks the rear of the vehicle, such as when checking for passing or changing lanes, the rearview mirror reflects the situation behind the vehicle.
  • the driver is able to see behind the vehicle by looking at the output, but if there is something obstructing the rear view in the cabin behind the back mirror, the rearview mirror may make it difficult to see behind. .
  • Luggage often blocks the rear view between the Kumira and the rear window of the vehicle.
  • FIG. It is a principal part explanatory view showing a part.
  • this device is equipped with an image pickup device (not shown) at the rear of the vehicle at a position where the field of view behind the vehicle can be sufficiently secured, and an image taken by the image pickup device on the ceiling of the driver's seat of the vehicle. And a reflecting mirror 42 that reflects the image projected by the display device 41 into the driver's field of view.
  • Fig. 55 is an explanatory diagram of the main parts showing the use state of the device. In Fig.
  • a reverse switch 51 that is turned on when the reverse gear of the vehicle is operated
  • a CCD camera 52 that captures the rear blind spot of the vehicle
  • an antenna 53 for receiving TV broadcasts and a TV tuner 54
  • a TV operation switch for rear seat occupants 55 a liquid crystal display 56 arranged near the ceiling in the middle of the front seat, and supporting the liquid crystal display from the ceiling of the vehicle, and It is composed of a display drive unit 57 composed of an electric motor that rotates the LCD screen to the driver's seat side and the rear passenger side, and a control unit 58 that controls the operation of these devices. I have.
  • the sound device since the sound device is installed in the center of the instrument panel, it is particularly necessary to change recording media such as cassette tape, DAT, CD, MD, DVD, etc. Only the occupants in the driver's seat and the front passenger seat can perform the setting operation of the device at the same time. However, the above-mentioned situation cannot be performed, and the convenience of the rear seated passengers is extremely low.
  • a display means for displaying visual information from a video playback device or the like is installed in the center of the instrument panel. The visibility is high for occupants in the front seat, but is displayed for occupants in the rear seat. There was a problem that visibility was reduced due to leaving the means.
  • the operating means is detached from the device as a remote controller (hereinafter, referred to as a remote controller).
  • a remote controller is detached from the storage location after the remote control operation.
  • the remote control is usually small, so it is difficult to find out where the operating means is, and there is a problem that the user must search for the remote control when operating.
  • audio equipment and video playback equipment are installed in the center of the instrument panel and fixed so that wiring and other connections can be made within the instrument panel.
  • the number of devices to be installed was limited, and it was necessary to select the devices more carefully when installing the devices, which reduced the development of the devices and reduced the convenience for users.
  • an operation means such as a touch panel for operating the display content of the display means is provided in the center of the instrument panel together with the display means, when operating the operation means, change the posture from leaning on the seat to the leaning posture. Operation must be performed by hand, or the user must reach for the operation, which makes it difficult to perform the operation easily.
  • TV receivers are mounted on rails provided on the ceiling of the bus so that they can be moved in the front-rear direction of the bus. It does not have a relationship with the movement stop position of the receiver, so each time the user uses the position of the TV receiver so that the position corresponds to the seat where the user is sitting, the TV reception There was a problem that the user had to stop while adjusting the movement of the aircraft, which was inconvenient for the user. '
  • the rear seat occupant does not use the television receiver, the rear seat is always located alone, which has a problem that it obstructs the driver and other passengers.
  • the protruding object obstructs the rear view of the rearview mirror, making it difficult for the driver to check the rear view.
  • the situation was not only when the vehicle was backing up, but also at the start of normal driving, when changing lanes during driving, when making a right or left turn, etc., that is, there was a problem that it occurred when it was necessary to check the rear.
  • a display device that projects an image captured by an imaging device on the ceiling of a driver's seat of a vehicle toward a front glass, and an image projected by the display device enters a driver's view.
  • the user When viewing the rear image with a reflector, the user always sees the rear image captured by the imaging device, and luggage is stored in the rear seats in the car.
  • the imaging device and the display device are operating. As a result, there is a problem that power consumption is generated and the in-vehicle battery easily rises.
  • Another problem was that organizing and processing information such as receipts received when shopping when going out of a car was complicated and often cumbersome.
  • the present invention has been made in order to solve such a problem, and an image pickup means provided on a moving body to capture an image, and a first means provided near a driver's seat of the moving body and displaying a rear image of the moving body.
  • Display means formed so as to be stowable, provided in the movable body behind the installation position of the first display means, and displaying a desired image, and judging a storage state of the second display means.
  • Storage state determining means for performing storage, and the storage state determining means If the first display means is determined not to have been performed, the first display means is provided with display control means for performing display control so as to display the image taken by the imaging means. It is an object of the present invention to provide a display device for a mobile body that can improve the rear view of the mobile body and improve user convenience.
  • the present invention is characterized in that the rear view image of the moving body is photographed by the imaging means, and the rear view image photographed by the photographing means is displayed by the display control means on the first display means. It is an object of the present invention to provide a display device for a moving body, which can always improve the rear view of the moving body irrespective of the storage state of the moving body and improve the convenience for the user.
  • the first display means has a display section which is displayed when the first display means is electrically connected to the mirror section, and the display control means determines that the second display means is stored by the storage state determination means. In this case, the display control operation is not performed and the rear image is projected by the mirror provided on the first display means. If it is determined that the second display means is not stored, the display control operation is performed. Then, the display unit provided in the first display unit is turned on, and the image taken by the imaging unit is displayed on the display unit, so that the rear view of the moving body is improved with a simple configuration, It is an object of the present invention to provide a display device for a moving body that can reduce the number of components because certain components can be used.
  • the present invention provides the second display means provided on the ceiling of the movable body so as to be foldable, and the storage state determination means determines that the second display means is stored when the second display means is folded substantially parallel to the ceiling, When the second display means protrudes downward from the ceiling, it is determined that it is not stored, so that the storage state of the second display means can be easily detected and can be configured with simple components. Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a display device for a moving object that can reduce costs.
  • the imaging means and the second display means are integrally formed, Since the unit formed integrally is provided on the ceiling behind the first display means in the moving body, it is mounted as a unit when it is mounted on the ceiling, so the man-hour for mounting the device can be reduced and the display for the moving body can be reduced in cost The purpose is to obtain the device.
  • the present invention provides imaging means for photographing an image, first display means provided near the driver's seat of the moving object, and displaying a rear image of the moving object, and formed so as to be stowable, and the first display in the moving object.
  • Second display means for displaying a desired image while being provided behind the installation position of the means, command means for instructing the image pickup means to pick up an image and outputting the image, and this command means
  • the image capturing means captures an image based on a command from the camera and controls the operation so as to output the image.
  • the image capturing means transmits the image information output by the image capturing control means.
  • the present invention is configured such that the imaging means is formed so as to be rotatable by 360 °, and imaging direction changing means for changing the imaging direction of the imaging means based on a command is provided.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a display device for a mobile object in which the use range of the device can be further improved and the convenience of the device can be further improved.
  • the communication means having the command means, the receiving means, and the third display means is provided outside the moving body, the state of the moving body can be constantly monitored outside the moving body, and theft and mischief can be prevented. It is an object of the present invention to obtain a display device for a mobile object that can be used. Further, according to the present invention, the imaging means and the second display means are integrally formed, and the integrally formed unit is provided on the ceiling portion behind the first display means in the movable body, so that the unit is attached to the ceiling portion.
  • the purpose of the present invention is to provide a mobile display device that can reduce the man-hours required for mounting the device and reduce costs. Disclosure of the invention
  • a display device for a moving body includes: an imaging unit provided on the moving body to capture an image; a first display unit provided near a driver's seat of the moving body to display a rear image of the moving body; It is formed so as to be able to be provided behind the installation position of the first display means in the moving body, and displays a desired image.
  • the rearward image captured by the imaging means is displayed on the first display means by the imaging means, and the rear image captured by the imaging means is displayed by the display control means.
  • the first display means has a mirror section and a display section which is displayed when the display section is guided, and the display control section determines the second state by the judgment of the storage state judgment section. If it is determined that the display means is housed, the display control operation is not performed and the rear projection is performed by the mirror provided in the first display means. An image is projected, and if it is determined that the second display means is not housed, a display control operation is performed, the display unit provided in the first display means is turned on, and the image pickup means takes a picture with this display unit. Since the displayed image is displayed, the rear view of the moving object can be improved with a simple configuration, and the existing components can be used, so that the number of components can be reduced.
  • the second display means may be provided on a ceiling portion of the moving body so as to be foldable, and the storage state determining means may be such that the second display means is folded substantially parallel to the ceiling portion.
  • the second display means protrudes downward from the ceiling, it is determined that it is not stored, so that the storage state of the second display means can be easily detected, The cost can be reduced because it can be composed of simple components.
  • the imaging means and the second display means are integrally formed, and the integrally formed unit is provided on the ceiling portion behind the first display means in the moving body. Since the unit is mounted as a unit when it is mounted on the ceiling, the man-hour for mounting the device can be reduced, and costs can be reduced.
  • a display device for a moving object includes: an imaging unit that captures an image; a first display unit that is provided near a driver's seat of the moving object and that displays a rear image of the moving object; A command that instructs the imaging means to capture an image and output the image, the second display means being provided behind the installation position of the first display means in the moving body and displaying a desired image; Means, imaging control means for performing operation control such that the imaging means captures an image based on an instruction from the instruction means, and outputs the image, and transmission means for transmitting the image information output by the imaging control means And receiving means for receiving the video information transmitted by the transmitting means, and third display means for displaying the video information received by the receiving means. It not, is possible to display the contents of the image captured by the imaging means The range of use of the device is improved, and the convenience of the device is improved.
  • the display device for a moving body wherein the imaging means is formed so as to be rotatable by 360 °, and a shooting direction changing means for changing a shooting direction of the imaging means based on a command is provided.
  • the display device for a moving body is provided with communication means having command means, receiving means, and third display means outside the moving body, so that the state of the moving body can be constantly monitored outside the moving body, Theft and mischief can be prevented.
  • the imaging means and the second display means are integrally formed, and the integrally formed unit is provided on the ceiling portion behind the first display means in the moving body.
  • the unit since the unit is mounted as a unit when it is mounted on the ceiling, the man-hour for mounting the device can be reduced, and costs can be reduced.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile device arrangement device and a mobile information processing device according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a main part configuration diagram showing a main part configuration of FIG.
  • FIG. 3 is an explanatory view of a main part showing a main part of FIG.
  • FIG. 4 is a main part configuration diagram showing the main part configuration of FIG.
  • FIG. 5 is a rear view of a main part showing a rear surface of the main part of FIG.
  • FIG. 6 is a side sectional view of a main part showing a side cross section of the main part of FIG.
  • FIG. 7 is a main part configuration diagram showing a main part configuration of FIG.
  • FIG. 8 is a rear view of a main part showing a rear surface of the main part of FIG.
  • FIG. 9 is a side sectional view of a main part showing a side cross section of the main part of FIG.
  • FIG. 10 is a rear cross-sectional view of a main part showing a rear cross-section of the main part of FIG.
  • FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a main configuration of a mobile device installation device according to a second embodiment.
  • FIG. 12 is an explanatory view of a principal part showing a principal part of FIG.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the operation flow of the mobile device arrangement device and the mobile information processing device according to the second embodiment.
  • FIG. 14 is a main state transition diagram showing a state where the main part has been moved from the state of FIG.
  • FIG. 15 is a main part state diagram showing a state of main parts in FIG.
  • FIG. 16 is a main state transition diagram showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state of FIG.
  • FIG. 17 is a main part state diagram showing a state of main parts in FIG.
  • FIG. 18 is a main state transition diagram showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state of FIG.
  • FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing a main configuration of a mobile information processing apparatus according to Embodiment 2.
  • FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of visible information used in FIG. 19 c
  • FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a flow of operation of the mobile information processing apparatus according to Embodiment 2. It's a trick.
  • FIG. 22 is a main part configuration diagram showing a main part configuration of the mobile object display device and the mobile object device installation device according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a main part of FIG.
  • FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing a main part of FIG.
  • FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing a main part of FIG.
  • FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing a main configuration of the display device for a mobile object according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a flow of operation of the display device for a mobile object according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 288 is a state transition diagram showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 29 is a main part state transition diagram showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state of FIG. 22.
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a display device for a mobile object and a device installation device for the mobile object according to the sixth embodiment.
  • FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing a main configuration of a display device for a moving object according to the sixth embodiment.
  • FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a flow of operation of the display device for a mobile object according to the sixth embodiment.
  • FIG. 33 is an explanatory view of a principal part showing a principal part of FIG. 30.
  • FIG. 34 is a main part state transition diagram showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state of FIG. 33.
  • FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of displaying the visible information output by the display device for a mobile object according to the sixth embodiment.
  • FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the visible information output by the mobile object display device according to Embodiment 6 is displayed.
  • FIG. 37 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a display device for a moving object according to Embodiment 7.
  • FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a main part of a display device for a mobile object and a device installation device for the mobile object according to the seventh embodiment.
  • FIG. 39 is an enlarged explanatory view of the display example of FIG. 38.
  • FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile device installation device according to Embodiment 8.
  • FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of FIG. 40.
  • FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a flow of the operation of the mobile device installation apparatus according to Embodiment 8.
  • FIG. 43 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile object information processing apparatus according to Embodiment 9.
  • FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of FIG. 43.
  • FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a flow of operation of the mobile information processing apparatus according to the ninth embodiment.
  • FIG. 46 is a detailed view of a main part showing a main part inside a conventional moving body.
  • FIG. 47 is a detailed view of a main part showing a main part inside a conventional moving body.
  • FIG. 48 is a configuration diagram showing a configuration of a main part provided in a conventional moving body.
  • FIG. 49 is an explanatory view of main parts showing main parts provided in a conventional moving body.
  • FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view of a main part showing a cross section of a conventional main part.
  • FIG. 51 is an exploded configuration diagram showing an exploded configuration of a main part provided in a conventional moving body.
  • FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of a main part showing a cross section of a conventional main part.
  • FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of a conventional main part.
  • FIG. 54 is an explanatory view of a main part showing a main part provided in a conventional moving body.
  • FIG. 55 is an explanatory view of a main part showing a main part provided in a conventional moving body.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a display device for a mobile object and a device arranging device for a mobile device according to Embodiment 1
  • FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a main part of FIG.
  • FIG. 24 is an explanatory view showing a main part of FIG. 22
  • FIG. 25 is an explanatory view showing a main part of FIG. 22
  • FIG. 26 is a display device for a moving body according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an operation flow of the mobile display device according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 28 is a main part state transition diagram showing a state where the main part has been moved from the state shown in FIG. 22.
  • FIG. 29 is a main part showing a state where the main part has been moved from the state shown in FIG. It is a state transition diagram.
  • FIG. 22 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile display device using the mobile device arrangement device of the first embodiment, where 1 2 1 is a driver's seat, and 1 2 2 is a passenger seat. 131, a right middle seat located behind the driver's seat, and 132 a left middle seat located behind the passenger seat and to the left of the right middle seat.
  • reference numeral 220 denotes a ceiling in the interior of the car, and the ceiling 220 is provided with a room mirror 222 as a first display means, a seat 122 arranged on the side, A rail section 222 provided as a guide means provided in the front-rear direction of the vehicle at a position between the seat 131 and the seats 122, 132 disposed on the left side, and this rail section.
  • the rearview mirror 222 is provided on the ceiling in front of the driver's seat 121, and has a function to display the situation behind the vehicle and the interior of the vehicle.
  • the exterior is as shown in Fig. 23. It is.
  • the rear view of the room mirror 2 210 is indicated by a broken line.
  • a groove is formed in the rail portion 220, and an opening of the groove portion is formed to be shorter than the groove portion.
  • a center console unit 230 described later is attached to the rail portion 220. At this time, the center console unit 230 is prevented from dropping to hold the wheel portion of the center console unit 230 on the back surface of the opening of the groove.
  • a locking portion for locking with a joint formed on the wheel portion of the center console unit 230 is formed on the back surface of the groove opening of the rail portion 222.
  • the center motor unit 2 230 is moved in the A direction or the B direction by rotating the drive motor by rotating the drive motor by the drive motor built in the wheel portion. ing.
  • a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the rail section 222 and the center console unit 230 has the same mechanism as that of FIG. 50 described in the background art.
  • Reference numeral 2230 denotes a center console unit.
  • An opening is formed in the housing 2240 of the center console unit and a part of the housing 2240. It is provided so as to be stowable, and when used, a display section 2250 as second display means protruding below the lower surface 2241 of the housing section 2240, and a rear surface of the housing section 2240 ( A storage unit such as a CD, MD, or DVD is stored in the operation unit 2260 provided on the near side in Fig. 22) and the audio and video devices provided in the housing 2240.
  • Reference numeral 2280 is provided on the lower surface of the center console unit 2230, and serves as an imaging means for capturing images of the rear and periphery of the automobile and the interior of the vehicle.
  • the camera is configured to be rotatable in a 360 ° direction so as to enable photographing in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction of the vehicle.
  • the camera 2280 is normally held at a position where the rear of the car can be photographed.
  • a plurality of openings 2 224 are formed in the lower surface 224 of the housing 224, and these openings 224 are similar to those of an IC card.
  • Each of the memory cards has an entrance through which a memory card can be inserted. In the present embodiment, five memory cards can be inserted.
  • a drive mechanism for projecting the display portion 222 from the lower surface 222 of the housing portion 222 or storing it in the housing portion 222 is described in a second embodiment described later.
  • the same components as those of the drive mechanism shown in FIGS. 4 to 6 to be described are provided in the housing 222.
  • the display unit 222 moves in the C direction from the lower surface of the housing 220, depending on where the housing 220 is located on the rail 220.
  • the display section 222 is configured to protrude or move in the direction D to be housed in the housing section 240.
  • center console unit 2 230 When the center console unit 2 230 is not used, it is moved to the front in the car as shown in Fig. 28 (the center console unit 2 230 Position).
  • the center-console unit 2 230 is upside down and the operation unit 2 260 It is provided on the front side of the center console unit 2 230 and is not configured to be housed in the housing 2 240. Also, the lower surface 2 of the housing 2 240 A camera capable of rotating 360 ° is provided at 241.
  • FIG. 23 to 25 The configuration of the room mirror 2 210 is described in the background art. The configuration is the same as that described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52.
  • the room mirror 2 210 usually has a mirror (mirror) surface 2 2 12, and a rear image is projected on the entire surface of the mirror surface 2 2 12.
  • a part of the mirror 2221 The display section 2 2 13 of the liquid crystal section is displayed, and the rear image actually shot by the camera 2280 is displayed as shown in FIG.
  • Reference numeral 2 211 denotes a support for attaching the room mirror 220 to the ceiling 220 of the automobile 100. Note that this support portion 2 211 may be attached to the upper part of the windshield 101 instead of being attached to the ceiling portion 220.
  • reference numeral 2250 denotes a display unit formed so as to be able to protrude / retract from the center console unit 2230 as the second display means
  • 2601 denotes whether or not the display unit 250 is protruding That is, the storage state determination means for determining the storage state of the display section 250 based on the display section set value selected by the set value selection section shown in FIG. 11 described in the first embodiment.
  • Reference numeral 2 denotes a display control unit that outputs an operation command to an image pickup unit 2280 and a first display unit 2210 based on a result determined by the storage state determination unit 2261.
  • Means 2602 is the imaging means 2280 and the first display means 22 when the storage state determining means determines that the display section 250 is housed in the housing section 240. If no operation command is output to 10 and the display unit 2250 is judged to protrude downward from the lower surface 2241 of the housing 2240, Is adapted to output the operation command to the 2 2 8 0 and a first display means 2 2 1 0.
  • a photographing operation is started, and a camera 280 such as a CCD camera as an imaging means for outputting a captured image, and a display control means 2602 Is a room mirror 2210 as the first display means that operates to display an image output from the camera 2280 based on the operation command output by the camera, and the room mirror is in a conductive state.
  • a camera 280 such as a CCD camera as an imaging means for outputting a captured image
  • a display control means 2602 Is a room mirror 2210 as the first display means that operates to display an image output from the camera 2280 based on the operation command output by the camera, and the room mirror is in a conductive state.
  • the state shown in FIG. 23 is reached, and when an image is output from the camera 228, this image is displayed on the liquid crystal display section 221, as shown in the state shown in FIG. Display in 3.
  • the operation of the camera 2280 and the imaging means 2280 take a picture depending on the storage state of the display section 2250 provided in the center console unit 2230.
  • the display unit 222 displays the obtained video, the following may be performed, and FIG. 27 includes these components.
  • an operating means 2603 is provided near the driver's seat 121, and when this operating means 2603 is operated, the display unit 2 2 provided on the center console unit 2230 is provided. Regardless of whether 50 is protruded or stored, an operation command is output to the camera 2280 and the room mirror 2210, and the video taken by the camera 2280 is output to the room mirror.
  • the display is made on the display section of the liquid crystal section provided in the 222. For this reason, when the display unit 2250 of the center console unit 2230 is stored in the housing 2240, the image taken by the driver with the camera 2280 This is useful when you want to display on a room mirror.
  • the camera 228 is configured to be able to rotate 360 °, so that the direction of the camera 228 can be adjusted according to the user's preference. That is, a photographing direction changing means 2604 for adjusting the photographing direction of the camera 2280 is provided in the vicinity of the driver's seat 1221, and the communication direction of the camera 2280 is provided.
  • the normal direction is the rearward direction.
  • the camera's shooting direction can be changed by controlling the rotation of the camera 2280 while the pressing operation on the shooting direction changing means 2604 is continuously performed, or by changing the shooting direction changing means 2
  • the rotation in the clockwise direction by 2 ° per one operation on the 604 may be performed.
  • FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a flow of the operation of the first embodiment.
  • the storage state judging means 2601 is connected to the housing 2 of the center console unit 2230. It is determined whether or not the display unit 2250 is stored in 40 (step 2701), and in this step 2701, the display unit 2250 is replaced with the housing unit 2240.
  • the storage state determining means 260 determines that the display protrudes downward from the lower surface 2240 of the camera
  • the display control means 2602 controls the force of the camera 2280 and the interior of the room mirror 2210.
  • the camera 2 280 and the display 2 2 13 are operated by turning on the display 2 2 13 of the liquid crystal unit provided in (Step 2 7 0 2), and this Step 2 7 0 2 is received.
  • Step 2703 To capture an image in the direction to which the camera 2280 faces.
  • Step 274 display the image captured in Step 2703 on the liquid crystal display 2221.
  • step 274 After the processing in step 274, the process returns to step 2701, and the same processing as described above is repeated.
  • step 2701 the storage state determination means 2601 does not protrude the display section 250 into the housing section 240 of the center console unit 230, that is, it is stored.
  • Display control means 2602 continues to be non-conductive to the liquid crystal section of the camera 2280 and the room mirror 2210, and the room mirror 2210 has the mirror function of the entire mirror surface 2221. Yes (Step 275). After the processing of step 275, the flow returns to step 2701 again, and the processing is repeated.
  • the movement operation of the center-unit console unit 230 is the same as that of the second embodiment described later, that is, as follows when the movement is performed for each position.
  • the center console unit 2 230 When the center console unit 2 230 is not used, the center console unit 2 230 is mounted on the rail section at the center front of the ceiling 2 200 as shown in Fig. 28.
  • the display unit is supported in the 2202 groove, and the display unit is housed in the housing 230 (first position).
  • the center-to-console unit 230 is set at four positions, but may be set at five positions as in a second embodiment described later.
  • the center console unit 2.2.30 automatically sets the initial position shown in Fig. 28 as the first position, regardless of the position, when the power of the moving object is turned off. It is supposed to move.
  • a rail section 222 is provided on each of the floor and ceiling of the car, and the center console unit 230 is replaced with either rail section 220 according to the intended use. It may be configured so that
  • the floor (floor) of the vehicle is provided. It is a moving object that cannot be used, that is, a moving object whose floor is a passage for passengers.For example, a bus, a train, an airplane, or the like can provide an environment in which the above-described device can be used. The range of use is improved, and the limited space in the moving body can be effectively used.
  • the center console unit 2 230 is provided with a camera as an imaging means for mainly capturing a rear image, and the display unit 2 250 of the center console unit 2 230 projects downward.
  • the part of the broken line shown in Fig. 22 which is the rear view of the room mirror 2210 is displayed on the display 2225.
  • the rear view is poor because the camera is blocked by the camera, but in this case, the rear image captured by the camera is displayed on the display of the liquid crystal unit provided in a part of the room mirror.
  • the rail section 110 and the center console unit 200 are described as being provided on the ceiling (roof section) in the automobile.
  • the console unit 200 and may be provided on the floor (floor) in the automobile.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile device installation device and a mobile information processing device according to Embodiment 2
  • FIG. 2 is a main configuration showing a main portion configuration of FIG.
  • FIG. 3 is an explanatory view of a main part showing the main part of FIG.
  • reference numeral 100 denotes a vehicle as a moving body, and in the first embodiment, the vehicle is described as a minivan-type vehicle that can accommodate six people.
  • 101 is a windshield of the automobile 100
  • 102 is an instrument panel formed of resin or the like provided in front of the cabin of the automobile 100
  • 103 is an instrument panel of the automobile 102.
  • a combination meter panel on the driver's seat side (to be described later) is provided with meters such as a speedometer and a cometer
  • 104 is a steering wheel.
  • reference numeral 105 denotes a dash pad on the upper surface of the instrument panel 102
  • reference numeral 106 denotes a display device provided at a substantially central portion of the instrument panel 102
  • reference numeral 107 Are operation units provided at equal intervals in a horizontal line.
  • the operation unit 107 is automatically connected to an external communication center by performing a pressing operation in an emergency. Activate the emergency call system that reports an emergency situation and turn on / off the hazard lamp that transmits an emergency stop to the outside of the vehicle.
  • PDA external electronic notebook
  • Reference numeral 108 denotes a camera as an imaging means
  • 109 denotes a storage space to be stored inside when a center console unit 200 described later is moved to the forefront
  • 110 denotes a center console unit 2
  • Reference numeral 00 denotes a rail portion as a guide means that is movable in the front-rear direction of the automobile 100, that is, in the direction A or B in FIG.
  • the rail portion 110 has a groove formed therein and is disposed on the floor in the vehicle interior.
  • the bottom of the groove has the same length as the rail 110 in the longitudinal direction. It is formed in the shape of a slit at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and this is the joint portion 111.
  • 120 is a front seat
  • the front seat 120 is composed of a driver seat 121 and a passenger seat 122.
  • 130 is the middle seat, and the middle seat 130 is also the driver's seat side 1 21 like the front seat 120, that is, the right seat 13 1 in Fig. 1 and the passenger seat side 1 2, that is, the left seat 13 in FIG. 1, and furthermore, although not shown, a rear seat is provided behind the middle seat 130, It consists of two seats like the front seats 120 and the middle seats 130.
  • the instrument panel 102 has a central control means for controlling all the devices mounted on the vehicle, and a display for controlling display means such as a display.
  • Control means volume control means for controlling the volume of a speaker for outputting sound
  • engine control means for controlling the operation of an engine mounted on the vehicle 100
  • air conditioner control means for controlling the operation of the air conditioner are provided.
  • These display control means, volume control means, engine control means, and air conditioner control means are operated by the central control means.
  • the central control means performs predetermined operation control on audio equipment, video equipment, and the like provided in the center console 200. Therefore, the passenger in the car operates the operating means 230 to operate the CD player, cassette tape player, DVD player, etc. provided in the center console unit 200. According to the audible information, the volume of the sound is controlled based on the command of the central control means, and the sound is output from the sound.
  • the audible information is controlled in such a manner that the volume of the audible information is controlled based on the command of the central control means and the sound is output from the loudspeaker. It has become.
  • the visible information is also controlled to be displayed on the display means 220 based on the command of the central control means, so that the visible information is displayed on the display means 220. Has become.
  • the volume of the loudspeaker is controlled based on a command from the central control means in the same manner as the audible information, and sound is output from the speed.
  • center console unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS.
  • FIG. 2 is an overall configuration diagram showing the overall configuration of the center console unit 200
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the center console unit 200 shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 4 is a relationship diagram showing a relationship with a rule section 110
  • Reference numeral 200 denotes a center console unit, and a housing 210 of the center console unit and an opening 212 formed in a part of the housing 210 are formed. It is provided so that it can be stored inside 1 and 2
  • An opening 213 is formed in the ray 220 and a part of the housing 210, and is provided so as to be housed in the opening 213.
  • An operation unit 2 30 protruding upward from 2 1 1, an operation unit 2 41 operated when the console unit 200 is moved in the A direction, and a console unit 200 moved in the B direction
  • Operating unit 2 42 a storage medium such as a CD, MD, DVD, etc. to be inserted into an audio or video device, and an entrance 2 43, which is attached to the front of the housing 210. It is composed of a camera 250 as an imaging means.
  • a plurality of openings 216 are formed in the upper surface 211 of the housing 210, and the openings through which a memory card such as an IC card can be inserted. In this embodiment, five memory cards can be inserted.
  • FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the display unit 220 which is a main part of the center console unit 200
  • FIG. 5 is a rear view showing the back of the display unit 220
  • FIG. FIG. 2 is a side sectional view showing a side section of 20.
  • FIG. 7 is an external view of a main part showing an external appearance of an operation part 230 which is a main part of the console unit 200
  • FIG. 8 is a rear view of the operation part 230 shown in FIG. 9 is a side cross-sectional view showing a side cross-section of the operation unit 230
  • FIG. 10 is a front cross-sectional view showing a front cross-section of the operation unit 230.
  • a drive mechanism for the display section 220 is provided below the support section 222 of the display section 220.
  • the drive mechanism includes a comb-like section 22 having a joint section 230 on one surface. 3 is provided in the housing portion 210 so as to mate with the joint portion 2 23 a formed on the comb-like portion 2 23, and the joint portion 224 a is formed partially.
  • Drive unit 2 24 The joining portion 2 24 a of the driving portion 2 24 and the joining portion 2 2 3 a of the comb portion 2 2 3 are joined together, and the driving portion 2
  • the shape part 2 23 also moves up and down in the H direction or the G direction.
  • the inside of the housing part 210 has a hollow shape like a fault, one end of which is fixed to the upper surface 211 of the housing part 210, and the other end is a single layer of the housing part 210.
  • Bar-shaped support portions 225 and 226 fixed to the upper surface 216 of the eye and supporting the display portion 220 are provided. Note that these rod-shaped support portions 2 25 and 2 26 are support portions of the display portion 220.
  • Each of the holes 222 formed in 222 is fitted in each of the holes 222 a and 222 b to prevent the display portion 220 from wobbling.
  • the display surface side of the display section 220 is disposed on the left side of the comb section 23, that is, on the rear side in the automobile.
  • An operation surface 2 31 of the operation unit 230 is provided with an air conditioner operation unit 2 32 for operating operation of an air conditioner (not shown) provided in the automobile, and a display unit for performing a predetermined operation.
  • An operation unit 235 provided with an end key, which is used to input a number of a hands-free phone (not shown) or a navigation device installed in a car or to perform calculations. Note that the operation surface 231 is inclined.
  • a drive mechanism 30 is configured.
  • the drive mechanism includes a comb-shaped part 237 formed in an arc shape and having a joint part 237a formed on one side, and a housing part 210. And a drive part 238 partially formed with a joint part 238a. ing.
  • a rotation shaft (not shown) is fitted into a part, and a fulcrum when the operation part 230 projects from the housing part 210 or is stored in the housing part 210.
  • the bearings 239a and 239b are formed, and on the opposite side of the bearings 239a and 239b, the operation unit 230 is attached to the housing unit 210.
  • Locking portions 239c and 239d are formed to lock with locking portions 211a formed inside the housing portion 210 so as not to come off.
  • the operation part 230 is formed by combining the joint part 238a of the drive part 238 with the joint part 237a of the comb-like part 237.
  • the comb-shaped portion 223 is also moved by drawing an arc in the J direction or the I direction by the rotation drive of the 8 in the I direction or the J direction.
  • the display 220 moves in the H direction depending on the position of the housing section 210 on the rail section 110 and moves from the top surface 211 of the housing section 210 to the display 2.
  • the display surface 2 21 of 20 is configured to protrude or move in the G direction to be housed in the housing 210, and the operation unit 230 is also provided in the housing 2.
  • the operation unit 230 is also provided in the housing 2.
  • 110 it moves in the I direction and the operation surface 23 of operation unit 230 protrudes from the upper surface 211 of housing 210.
  • the lower surface 2 15 of the housing section 210 is formed in a groove inside the rail section 110.
  • a rotatable wheel portion 201 having a coupling portion 202 formed on a peripheral surface portion to be engaged with the locking portion 111 is provided, and a driving portion (not shown) is provided on the wheel portion 201. Is built in, and the wheel unit 201 rotates by the rotation of the driving unit.
  • the wheel portion 201 since the wheel portion 201 has a coupling portion 202 formed on the peripheral surface portion and a locking portion 111 formed on the rail portion 110, the driving portion rotates. Then, the center console unit 200 moves in the A direction or the B direction. That is, as shown in FIG. 2, when the wheel unit 201 rotates in the G direction based on a command from the operation unit, the center console unit 200 moves in the A direction, and conversely, the wheel unit When the unit 201 rotates in the H direction, the center console unit 200 moves in the B direction c.
  • the wheel unit 201 becomes the rail unit 1 1 Since it is coincident with 0, it does not move in either the A direction or the B direction, and the center console unit 200 is positioned at the stop position of the drive unit.
  • FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the main part that controls the operation of the mobile device installation device according to Embodiment 2, and Fig. 12 explains the main parts of Fig. 11.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an operation flow of the mobile device installation apparatus according to the second embodiment. First, a main configuration for controlling the operation of the center console unit 200 will be described. explain.
  • Reference numerals 241, 242 denote operation units.When the center console unit 200 is moved in the direction A shown in FIG. 1, the operation unit 241 is pressed and when the center console unit 200 is moved in the B direction. By performing a pressing operation on the operation unit 242, a predetermined command signal is output.
  • a predetermined command signal is output.
  • the operation units 241, 242 are continuously pressed within a predetermined time (for example, within 2 seconds), the number of times of the pressing operation is counted. Setting value selection described later
  • the means 111 is adapted to determine the set position of the center console unit 200.
  • the set value selection means 1101 sets a predetermined setting from the movement set value stored in the storage means 110 (described later) based on the command signal output from the operation units 241 and 242. Select a value and output this set value. 1102 is located at each of the seats 120, 130 provided in the vehicle interior-the direction and distance that the wheel unit 201 moves, and the display provided on the center console unit 200.
  • the setting value of whether or not the unit 220 protrudes from the upper surface of the center console unit 200, and the operation unit 230 provided on the center console unit 200 are connected to the central console unit 200.
  • the center console unit 200 has five fixed positions, the first position is the initial position, and the center console unit 2 00 is stored in the storage space 109 and is located at the forefront of the rail 110. Therefore, the movement setting value of the center-to-console unit 200 is 0 cm at the first position, the display unit 220 is housed in the housing unit 210, and the operation unit 230 is also in the housing unit. It is stored in 210. This first position does not correspond to any seating position.
  • the second position is a position corresponding to the driver's seat, and a movement setting value for moving by 5 cm in the direction A shown in Fig. 1 based on the first position is set, and the display unit 220 is the housing unit 21.
  • the operating unit 230 is housed in the housing 0, and protrudes from the upper surface of the housing unit 210 so as to have a predetermined inclination angle ⁇ .
  • the third position is for the passenger seat, and the first position
  • the movement set value is set to move 15 cm in the direction A shown in Fig. 1 based on the position of the display unit, and the display unit 220 projects from the upper surface of the housing unit 210.
  • the operation section 230 also projects from the upper surface of the housing section 210 so as to have a predetermined inclination.
  • the fourth position is a position corresponding to the middle seat, and a movement set value for moving 60 cm in the direction A shown in FIG. 1 based on the first position is set.
  • the operation section 230 is configured to protrude from the upper surface of the housing section 210. In this case, the fourth position corresponds to both the left and right middle seats.
  • the fifth position is for rear seats, and a movement set value for moving 120 cm in the direction A shown in FIG. 1 based on the first position is set.
  • the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are configured to protrude from the upper surface of the housing unit 210.
  • the fourth position corresponds to both the left and right rear seats.
  • the console unit 200 When the console unit 200 is set to the first position, if there are three consecutive pressing operations on the operating means 241, the second position, the third position, and the fourth position Is set to Conversely, if the center console unit 200 is in this state, that is, in the fourth position, if the operating means 242 has been pressed twice consecutively, it will pass through the third position to the second position. It is set to the position.
  • the console unit 200 when it is moved for each position, it is as follows. That is, when the center console unit 200 is not used, the console unit 200 is installed as shown in FIG. It is housed in the center lower part of the instrument panel (first position), and the operation state of the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 of the center console unit 200 is as shown in Fig. 15. is there.
  • the wheel unit 201 rotates and the operation starts from the first position. Move to the position shown in Fig. 16 corresponding to the seat (second position). At this time, the operation states of the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 of the center console unit 200 are as shown in FIG.
  • the robot moves in the A direction from the third position by one position and moves to the position shown in Fig. 18 corresponding to the middle seat ( 4th position).
  • the operating state of the center console unit 200 at this time is also as shown in FIG.
  • 1103 shown in FIG. 11 is a movement set value selected from the storage means 1102 shown in FIG. 5 outputted from the set value selection means, and a display section setting as a display means protrusion set value.
  • the center console unit 200 is moved according to the movement set value based on the operation unit setting value as the operation value and the operation means protrusion setting value, and the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are moved to the housing unit 2.
  • Movement control means that protrudes from the upper surface of the housing 10 or is housed in the housing 210
  • 1104 is a center console unit 200 based on a control signal output from the movement control means 1103. Is moved in the direction A or B shown in FIG.
  • This moving means 1 1 0 4 is a wheel section 201, a coupling section 202 formed on the outer peripheral surface of the wheel section 201, A drive unit (not shown) built into the wheel unit 201, a rail unit 110, a locking unit 111 formed in the groove of the rail unit 110, and a display unit 22 0 drive mechanism and the drive mechanism of the operation unit 230.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the operation of the mobile device installation device according to the second embodiment, and the operation of this device will be described with reference to FIG.
  • step 1300 when the power of the mobile body is turned on, the operation standby state is set (step 1300), and the operation starts.
  • the setting value selection means 1 101 is operated in the direction A shown in FIG. 1, that is, the operation section 2 41 of the console unit 200 is pressed. It is determined whether or not the operation of the operation unit 241 has been performed in step 1301, and if the operation of the operation unit 241 has been performed in this step 131 2 4 1 pressing operation Is determined within the predetermined time (for example, within 2 seconds) (step 1302), and the position set in the center-to-console unit 200, which is provided in the housing, is constantly updated.
  • the stored value of the storage unit (not shown) to be stored is extracted by the set value selecting means 111 (step 1303).
  • step 1304 it is determined whether or not the set value selecting means 1101 moves by one position (step 1304), and in this step 1304 one position is determined. If it is determined that the position has been moved, the set value selecting means 1101, based on the contents of step 133, sets the center console unit 200 corresponding to the position obtained by adding one position to the current position. The moving direction and the moving distance of 0, and the setting value of the display unit for determining whether or not the display unit 220 is projected from the upper surface of the housing unit 210, and the operation unit 230 to the housing unit 210 The operation unit setting value of whether or not to protrude from the upper surface is selected and output to the movement control means 1103 (step 1305).
  • the movement control means 1 1 0 3 receives the output from the set value selecting means 1 1 0 1 and operates the moving means 1 1 0 4 to perform the specified moving operation
  • a control signal is output to move the center console unit 200, and the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are protruded if they are set to protrude and stored in the housing unit 210. If the set value is to be set, it is stored in the housing 210 (step 1306). After the operation of step 1306, the operation returns to step 1301, and the operation units 241, 42 become ready for operation.
  • the operation processing after step 1301 is the same as described above. become.
  • step 13304 it is determined whether or not the setting value selecting means 1101 is a movement of two positions (step 1307). If it is determined in step 13 07 that the movement is two positions, the setting value selection 1 101 is the direction and distance of movement of the center console unit 200 corresponding to the position obtained by adding 2 positions to the current position, and the display section 220 is viewed from the top of the housing section 210. A display unit setting value indicating whether or not to protrude and an operation unit setting value indicating whether or not the operation unit 230 is to be protruded from the upper surface of the housing unit 210 are selected and provided to the movement control unit 1103.
  • Step 13 08 the movement control means 110 3 receives the output from the set value selection means 110 1 so as to perform a predetermined movement operation.
  • An operation control signal is output to the moving means 110 to move the center console unit 200 and the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are protruded (step 1309). .
  • step 1309 the process returns to step 1301, and the operation units 241, 242 become ready for operation, and the operation processing after step 1301 is the same as described above. .
  • step 1307 it is determined whether the set value selection means 111 is a movement for three positions (step 1310), and this step is performed. If it is determined that the movement is 3 positions in 1 3 0, the setting value selection means 1 1 0 1 is set to the center corresponding to the position obtained by adding 3 positions to the current position, based on the contents of step 13 0 3
  • the moving direction and moving distance of the console unit 200, the display unit setting value indicating whether or not the display unit 220 projects from the upper surface of the housing unit 210, and the operation unit 230 by the housing unit Select the operation section setting value for whether or not to protrude from the upper surface of 210 and output it to the movement control means 1103 (step 1311).
  • step 1311 move The control means 1103 receives the output from the set value selection means 110101 and performs a predetermined moving operation. Moves the center console one Ruyunitto 2 0 0 outputs an operation control signal to the mobile unit 1 1 0 4, to protrude the operation unit 2 3 0 and the display unit 2 2 0 (Step 1 3 1 2). After this step 1 3 1 2 Returning to step 1301, the operation sections 241, 242 are in an operation standby state, and the operation processing after step 1301, is the same as described above.
  • step 13 03 determines that the movement is 4 positions, and the setting is made based on the contents of step 13 03.
  • the value selection means 1101 moves the center console unit 200 corresponding to the position obtained by adding 4 positions to the current position, the moving direction and the moving distance, and the display unit 220 serves as the housing unit 210.
  • Step 1 3 1 3 Display unit setting value to determine whether to protrude from the upper surface of the housing and operation unit setting value to determine whether to protrude the operating unit 230 from the upper surface of the housing unit 210, and perform movement control means 1 1 0 3 (Step 1 3 1 3), and after the processing of Step 1 3 13, the movement control means 1 103 receives the output from the set value selection means 1 101 and performs the predetermined movement.
  • An operation control signal is output to the moving means 110 to perform the operation, and the center console 200 Causes the movement, to protrude the operation unit 2 3 0 and the display unit 2 2 0 (Step 1 3 1 4).
  • step 1 3 14 After the operation of step 1 3 14, the process returns to step 1 3 0 1, and the operation units 2 4 1 and 2 4 2 are in the operation standby state, and the operation processing after step 13 0 1 is the same as described above .
  • step 1301 the set value selecting means 1101 operates in the direction B shown in Fig. 1, that is, whether the operation section 242 of the center console unit 200 is pressed. (Steps 1315), and if it is determined in this step 1315 that the operation of the operation section 242 has been performed, the setting value selection means 1101 It is determined how many times the pressing operation has been performed within a predetermined time (for example, within 2 seconds) (step 1316), and it is installed in the housing and the center console unit 200 is currently set. Description of a storage unit that constantly updates and stores the position (provided inside the set value selection unit 1101, and determines the movement set value etc. by comparing with this storage unit and referring to this storage unit).
  • step 1317 The contents are extracted by the set value selecting means 1101 (step 1317). Next, based on the contents of step 1317, it is determined whether or not the setting value selecting means 1101 moves by one position (step 1318), and in this step 1318, one position is determined. If it is determined that the position has been moved, the setting value selecting means 1101 sets the center console unit 2 corresponding to the position obtained by subtracting one position from the current position based on the contents of step 1317.
  • the operation unit setting value for whether or not to protrude from the upper surface is selected and output to the movement control means 1103 (step 1319).
  • the movement control means 1 is selected.
  • 1 0 3 receives the output from the set value selection means 1 1 0 1 and operates the moving means 1 1 0 4 so as to perform a predetermined movement operation
  • the control signal is output to move the center console unit 200 and the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are protruded if they are set to protrude, and stored in the housing unit 210.
  • step 1320 If the set value is to be set, it is stored in the housing 210 (step 1320). After the operation of step 1320, the operation returns to step 1301, and the operation units 241, 2442 are in an operation standby state.
  • the operation processing after step 1301 is as described above. It will be the same.
  • step 1318 it is determined whether or not the setting value selecting means 1101 is a movement of two positions (step 1312). If it is determined that the position is moved by 2 positions in 1 3 2 1, based on the contents of step 13 17, the setting value selection unit 1 1 0 1 sets the center corresponding to the position obtained by adding 2 positions to the current position.
  • the moving direction and moving distance of the console unit 200, the display unit setting value indicating whether or not the display unit 220 projects from the upper surface of the housing unit 210, and the operation unit 230 by the housing unit Whether to protrude from the upper surface of 210 Select the operation unit setting value and output it to the movement control means 1103 (Step 1
  • step 1 3 2 2 After the processing of step 1 3 2 2, the movement control means 1 1 0 3 receives the output from the set value selection means 1 1 0 1 and performs a predetermined movement operation. The operation control signal is output to 4 and the center console unit 200 is moved, and the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are protruded if they are set to protrude. If the set value is to be stored in 10, it is stored in the housing 210 (step 1332). After the operation of step 1 3 2 3, return to step 1
  • step 1 3 2 4 it is determined whether or not the setting value selection means 1 101 is a 3 position movement (step 1 3 2 4). If it is determined that the position is moved by 3 positions in 1 3 2 4, the setting value selection means 1 101 selects the sensor corresponding to the position obtained by adding 3 positions to the current position, based on the contents of step 13 17. The moving direction and moving distance of the evening console unit 200, the display unit setting value indicating whether or not the display unit 220 is projected from the upper surface of the housing unit 210, and the operation unit 230 are displayed.
  • the operation section set value for whether or not to protrude from the upper surface of the housing section 210 is selected and output to the movement control means 1103 (step 1325), and the processing of this step 1325 is performed. Thereafter, the movement control means 1103 receives the output from the set value selection means 110101 and performs a predetermined movement operation.
  • An operation control signal is output to the moving means 111 to move the center console 200 and move the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230. If the set value is to be stored in the housing section 210, it is stored in the housing section 210 (step 1326). After the operation of step 1 3 2 6, return to step 1 The operation standby state of 42 is entered, and the operation processing after step 1301 is the same as described above.
  • the setting value selection means 1 101 determines that the movement is 4 positions, and the setting is performed based on the contents of step 1317.
  • the value selection means 1 101 is used to move the sensing direction and the moving distance of the sensor console 200 corresponding to the position obtained by adding 4 positions to the current position, and the display unit 220 to the housing unit 211.
  • the display control unit 1 selects a display unit setting value as to whether or not to protrude from the upper surface of the housing unit 0 and an operation unit set value as to whether the operating unit 230 is to protrude from the upper surface of the housing unit 210.
  • step 1327 Output to 103 (step 1327), and after the processing of step 1327, the movement control means 1103 receives the output from the set value selection means 1101 and An operation control signal is output to the moving means 111 to perform the moving operation, and the center console unit 200 is moved.
  • the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are stored (step 1328). After the operation of step 1328, the process returns to step 1301, and the operation unit 2411 and 2442 are in an operation standby state.
  • the operation processing after step 1301 is the same as described above. .
  • step 1 3 15 If the setting value selection means 1 101 determines in step 1 3 15 that the operation of the operation section 4 2 2 has not been performed, the flow returns to step 1 310 and the operation sections 2 4 1 and 2 The operation standby state of 42 is entered, and the operation processing after step 1301 is the same as described above.
  • a mobile information processing device using cameras 108 and 250 as imaging means is provided.
  • This mobile information processing apparatus will be described with reference to FIGS. 1, 2, and 19 to 21.
  • FIG. 19 shows an information processing apparatus for a mobile body using cameras 108 and 250.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration
  • FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing an object to be photographed by a camera as a main part of FIG. 19, and
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram of FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of an operation of the information processing apparatus for a mobile body.
  • Reference numeral 108 denotes a camera provided as an imaging means provided on the instrument panel 102
  • reference numeral 250 denotes a camera provided as an imaging means provided on a front portion of the center console unit 200.
  • the cameras 108 and 250 have the same function, and capture the visible information by holding the object to be photographed in front of the cameras 108 and 250.
  • the contents are, for example, the contents of a receipt issued from the store when a product is purchased, a leaflet for inserting a newspaper, a tourist guidebook, and the like.
  • These information sources are captured by the cameras 108 and 250 and displayed on the display unit 106 provided on the instrument panel 102 and the display unit 220 provided on the center console unit 200. It is supposed to be.
  • Analysis means for comparing and analyzing the dictionary information showing the visible information for analysis 1902 analyzes the contents of the visible information taken by the analysis means 1901 with the cameras 108 and 250 This is a storage unit that stores dictionary information as visible information to be compared when performing this operation.
  • This storage unit 1902 stores figures, symbols, alphabets, hiragana, katakana, kanji, numbers, etc. It stores dictionary information necessary for recognizing characters.
  • Reference numeral 1903 denotes display control means for outputting the analysis result of the analysis means 1901 to the display means 106 and 220, and controlling the display so as to display the information. Is composed of these.
  • FIG. 20 shows a display example of a receipt issued at a store, where 2001 is the store name, 2002 is the address (address) of the store, 2003 is the purchase date, and 200 Four Is the name of the item to be paid, and 2005 is the breakdown of the payment.
  • Each piece of information 200 1 to 200 5 used in FIG. 20 is photographed by the camera 108 or the camera 250, and the photographed contents are stored in the storage means 1902.
  • the analysis means 1901 performs analysis in comparison with the dictionary information, that is, recognizes the character information and the like of each piece of information 201 to 205, and displays the recognition result (analysis result) on the display section 106. Is displayed on the display unit 220.
  • FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the flow of the operation of the mobile information processing apparatus.
  • the apparatus enters a standby state of waiting for an imaging operation on the apparatus (step 2100), and the operation is started.
  • the analyzing means 1901 determines whether or not the visible information has been read from the camera 108 or the camera 250 (step 2101), and the visible information is read in this step 201. If it is determined that the information corresponds to the information corresponding to the visible information read by the camera from the storage means 1902, the analyzing means 19001 selects and extracts the information, and performs analysis (step 2102). ).
  • the display control means 1903 determines whether or not the result analyzed in step 2102 has been output from the analyzing means 1901 (step 2103). If it is determined that the result has been output, the result is displayed on the display unit 106 or the display unit 220 (step 2104).
  • step 210 After the processing of step 210 is completed, the flow returns to step 211 again to be in a standby state of waiting for an imaging operation, and the same processing as above is performed in step 211 and subsequent steps.
  • the analyzing means 1901 determines that the visible information has not been read in step 2101, it returns to step 2101 again, and enters a standby state of waiting for an imaging operation. 01 and below, the same processing as above is performed. If it is determined that the analysis result is not output in step 2103, the process returns to step 2103 and waits until the analysis result is output.
  • the operating unit for operating these devices and the display means for displaying the visual information of these devices as images can be housed in the arranged arrangement means, and the center console unit 200 which can be protruded is railed. It is possible to move along the section 110, and the set value of the center console unit 200 corresponding to each seat, the set value of the display unit 220, and the set value of the operation unit 230 are set.
  • the center console unit 200 can be used properly according to the operation content, so that any person sitting in any seat can use the appropriate position for audio equipment and video playback equipment. Can be operated Based on the operation, the center console unit 200 is automatically moved to the position corresponding to the occupant of each seat, so the user himself / herself fine-tunes the position of the center console unit 200. Even if you do not make a decision, the position is automatically set to the optimal position, which eliminates the hassle of the setting operation and improves the convenience for the user. That is, the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 can be automatically protruded upward or stored by only operating the operation unit, so that such a troublesome operation can be eliminated. The convenience of the system is improved.
  • Embodiments 1 and 2 described above it has been described that the set values shown in FIG. 12 are stored in the storage means 1102, but these set values are used as initial set values.
  • the configuration may be such that the user can change it as appropriate, and this configuration further improves the convenience for the user.
  • the center console units 200 and 230 when the center console units 200 and 230 are moved, the operation unit provided on the front part of the center console unit 200 and 230 is operated.
  • a remote controller (not shown) was provided for each seat, and these remote controllers
  • the center console unit may be configured to be movable, and the operability for the user is further improved by such a configuration.
  • the display unit 220 provided in the center console unit 200 only moves vertically, but the display surface and the support unit of the display unit 220 are described.
  • a direction adjustment mechanism that can adjust the direction of the display unit 220 up, down, left, and right may be provided between the unit and the unit 2 21.
  • the center console unit 230 provided on the ceiling 220 is guided by the rail 220 provided on the ceiling 220 so that Although described as being movable in the front-rear direction, in the sixth embodiment, the same mobile device arrangement device as in the first embodiment is provided movably on the floor in the vehicle, and is mounted on the ceiling.
  • the mobile device display device may be fixedly provided at a predetermined location on the ceiling, for example, between a front seat and an intermediate seat provided in an automobile as shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile display device and a mobile device installation device according to Embodiment 6, and FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing a main configuration of FIG. 30.
  • FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the flow of the operation of the display device for a mobile object according to the sixth embodiment.
  • FIG. 33 shows a state in which the display unit, which is a main part of FIG. 30, is housed in the housing.
  • FIG. 34 is an explanatory view showing a state where the display unit, which is a main part of FIG. 30, is housed in the housing.
  • a rail section 110 provided between a driver's seat and a passenger's seat is provided on the floor of a car 100, and is guided in the groove of the rail section to move in the A or B direction.
  • a mobile device installation device consisting of a center console unit 200 that operates, and a room mirror that is installed above the driver's seat and that displays mainly rearward images is installed on the ceiling 220.
  • a mobile display device composed of 2201 and a display unit 30000 mainly used by passengers in the front and rear seats.
  • Room Mira 1 2 2 1 0 rear view Is indicated by a broken line.
  • the display unit 3100 includes a housing section 310 in which a storage section 3201 in which a display section 3200 (described later) is partially stored is formed, and the housing section 3101.
  • the display section 3 0 2 0 can be stored in the storage section 3 0 2 1 and the display section 3 0 2 0 projects the display surface downward while releasing the locking section 3 0 1 2 when the user uses it.
  • the camera is provided behind the unit 320 (in FIG. 30, on the near side), and includes a camera 3030 as an imaging unit capable of capturing an image in a 360 ° direction based on a command.
  • reference numeral 3100 denotes a first communication unit provided with a transmission unit 3101 and a reception unit 3102 for transmitting a command from outside the vehicle, and the first communication unit 3100 includes:
  • the display unit 310 is provided as third display means for displaying the visible information received by the receiving unit 310.
  • Reference numeral 3110 denotes a transmitting unit 311 and a transmitting unit 311 for transmitting video information captured by an imaging unit 3120 described later to a receiving unit 3102 of the first communication unit 3100.
  • This is a second communication unit provided with a reception unit 3112 that receives a signal transmitted from the transmission unit 3101 of the communication unit 3100.
  • the receiving unit 3 1 1 2 of the second communication unit 3 1 1 2 receives the designated signal transmitted from the transmitting unit 3 1 0 1, and the imaging unit 3 0 3 via the operation unit 2 6 3 Conduction is made to the imaging means 300 so that 0 captures an image.
  • this command is also transmitted from the transmitting unit 3101 so that the photographing direction changing means 2604 To instruct the imaging direction of the imaging means 3030.
  • the imaging means 3 0 3 0 shoots in a predetermined direction, outputs the shot video information to the transmitting section 3 1 1 1 of the second communication means, and outputs the information from the transmitting section 3 1 1 1 to the first communication. Transmit to means 3100.
  • the receiving section 3102 of the first communication means 3100 receives the transmission signal, and based on this reception, displays the video taken by the imaging means 310 on the third display means 31 0 3 is displayed.
  • the first communication means 3100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.
  • FIG. 35 shows a case where a mobile phone 350 is used as the first communication means 310, and the mobile phone 350 has a display section 3501 as a third display means. And an operation unit 3502 for outputting a command signal to the second communication means 3200.
  • a transmitting unit 3501 and a receiving unit 3502 are provided inside the mobile phone 350.
  • the content displayed on the display section 3510 is obtained by shooting with the shooting direction of the camera 3030 being forward.
  • FIG. 36 shows a personal computer (hereinafter referred to as a personal computer) 3600 used as the first communication means 3100.
  • the personal computer body 3601 and the personal computer body It is composed of a display section 3620 that displays information from the 3610 and a keyboard 3630 that is an operation section for operating the personal computer 3610. .
  • the PC 3601 is provided with a communication adapter for communicating with the outside, and the communication adapter has the functions of the transmitting unit 3501 and the receiving unit 3502. are doing.
  • Display 3 6 2 0 Display surface 3
  • the contents displayed in 6 21 are the same as those in FIG. 35, and are images taken with the imaging direction of the camera 310 being forward.
  • the normal imaging means 3030 turns on the indication which is a power operation of the car, and the operation is controlled based on the stored state of the second display means 222, but the operation means 26 It is configured to be in a conductive state when there is a command via the imaging direction changing means 26 and the imaging direction changing means 26.
  • the operation is started in the initial state (step 3200), and it is determined whether the identification 3 is OFF or ON (step 3201).
  • step 201 If it is determined in step 201 that the signal is the identification OFF, the receiving unit of the second communication unit 3110 determines whether or not a command signal has been transmitted from the first communication unit 31.0.
  • the receiving section 311 of the second communication means 311 determines that the command signal has been received in step 3202, the image is taken by the command signal transmitted from the first communication means 3100.
  • the receiving unit 3111 of the second communication unit 3110 determines whether or not an instruction to change the imaging direction of the unit 3030 is included (step 3203).
  • the imaging direction changing unit 2603 changes the imaging direction of the imaging unit 3030 based on the command (step 3203). 0 4), and the operating means 260 4 starts the photographing of the imaging means 30 30 (step 3 205).
  • the transmitting section 3111 of the second communication means 31110 transmits the video information captured in step 3205 to the first communication means 3110 (step 3206),
  • the receiving unit 3 1 1 2 of the second communication means 311 determines whether or not a command to end the shooting has been transmitted from the first communication means 3 1 0 0 (step 3 2 0 7), if it is determined in step 3207 that the command to end the shooting has been given, the shooting by the imaging means 3030 is ended (step 3208), and the process returns to step 3201. Return and repeat the process.
  • step 3201 If it is determined in step 3201 that the indication is in the ON state, the process proceeds to step 1701 shown in FIG. 27 to perform the subsequent operations. If it is determined in step 3202 that the command signal from the first communication means 3100 has not been transmitted, the process returns to step 3201 again to repeat the operation.
  • the photographing direction of the image pickup means 3300 may be the direction currently set.
  • the photographing of the photographing means 310 is started without changing the photographing direction (step 3209).
  • step 3207 If it is determined in step 3207 that a command to end photographing has not been transmitted from the first communication means 3100, the process returns to step 3206 again, and the processing is repeated.
  • FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 are explanatory views as viewed from the right rear of the automobile, and FIG. 33 stores the display unit 300 provided in the display unit 300.
  • the photographing direction of the camera 3030 as an image pickup means is in a state of facing the rear of the automobile (in FIG. 33, the front side), and FIG. 34 shows a state in which the locking section 3102 is operated.
  • the figure shows a state in which the display unit is protruded downward from the storage section 310 of the display section 320 formed in the housing section 310.
  • the shooting direction of the camera 3030 is the same as in FIG.
  • the second communication means for communicating with the mobile phone 350 and the personal computer 360 is provided in the car, and the first communication means is provided even when the car is unmanned.
  • FIG. 37 is an explanatory view showing a state in which a child seat is mounted on an intermediate seat provided in an automobile, and an infant is seated on the seat
  • FIG. 38 is a camera 300 as an image pickup means.
  • Explanatory drawing showing the image of a child sitting in a child seat taken on the display provided in the car.
  • Fig. 39 shows the display of the display described in Fig. 38. It is an enlarged view.
  • the state inside the car room and the state around the car are transmitted to the external first communication means 3100. May be displayed on a display device 106 provided on an instrument panel 102 in a car.
  • the video taken by the camera 300 is displayed on the display device 106 provided on the instrument panel 102, and the camera 30 is located near the driver's seat.
  • An operation unit (not shown) for taking a picture of the camera 30 is provided.
  • the status of the interior of the car is displayed on the display device 106 provided on the instrument panel 102, an operation is performed.
  • the image is taken by the camera 303 and displayed on the display device 106.
  • the shooting direction of the camera 3030 is backward, Changes are also possible.
  • the seventh embodiment can display an image in the vehicle cabin on a nearby display device, so that the range of use of the device is widened and the convenience of the device is further improved.
  • FIG. 8 a mobile device installation device according to another embodiment 8 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42.
  • the operation units 241, 242 provided on the front part of the center console unit 200 are operated.
  • the eighth embodiment it is possible to detect a occupant seated in each seat provided in an automobile and to more easily select a movement to a location corresponding to the seated seat. It is a thing.
  • reference numeral 4001 denotes occupant detection means for detecting whether or not there is a occupant in each seat provided in the automobile, and the occupant detection means 4001 is substantially at the center of the seat.
  • a pressure sensor, an occupant camera, etc. (not shown) are installed in the section. If there is a occupant, the pressure sensor applies a pressing force, so that it is detected that there is a occupant. This is to detect the presence or absence of a seated person by photographing the upper part and performing image analysis.
  • Reference numeral 4002 denotes occupant presence / absence determination means for determining whether or not each seat has a occupant based on the result detected by the occupant detection means 4001. The occupant presence / absence judging means 4002 judges from the result of the detection by the occupant detecting means 4001 that a seat or the like only holding luggage has no occupant.
  • 4003 is provided with a position sensor (not shown) for judging the posture, body shape, etc. of the occupant of the seat detected by the occupant detection means 4001 as having an occupant.
  • 4004 displays a list of the seats where the occupants are present based on the results output from the occupant presence / absence determination means 4002 and the occupant state determination means 4003.
  • a predetermined set value is selected from the set values, and this set value is output.
  • Reference numeral 4007 denotes the direction and distance in which the wheel unit 201 moves, the center and the console unit at the positions of the seats 120 and 130 provided in the car interior as shown in FIG.
  • the display unit 220 provided in the unit 200 is connected to the center console unit.
  • This storage means stores the set values in association with each other.
  • reference numeral 400 denotes a movement set value selected from the storage means 400 output from the set value selection means 400, a display section set value as a display means protrusion set value, and an operation means protrusion set value.
  • the center console unit 200 is moved according to the movement set value based on the operation unit set value of the operation unit, and the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are protruded from the upper surface of the housing unit 210 or the housing unit 210 is moved.
  • Movement control means to be accommodated in the body part 210, and reference numeral 409 designates the center console unit 200 in the direction A shown in FIG. 1 based on the control signal output from the movement control means 408. Or move it in direction B, and display 2 2 0 and operation 2
  • the moving means 4 is similar to the structure described in the first embodiment.
  • 0 09 is a wheel portion 201, a joint portion formed on the outer peripheral surface of the wheel portion 201. 202, a drive unit (not shown) built in the wheel unit 201, a rail unit 110, a locking unit 111 formed in a groove of the rail unit 110, and It comprises a drive mechanism for the display section 220 and a drive mechanism for the operation section 230.
  • reference numeral 4005 denotes an airbag device (not shown) provided in the vehicle based on the results output from the occupant presence / absence determining means 4002 and the occupant state determining means 4003.
  • the airbag device which is controlled by the airbag control device 400 is referred to as an advanced airbag device.
  • step 420 When the automobile identification is turned on, the operation of the apparatus is started (step 420), and the occupant detection means 4001 detects the occupants of each seat in the automobile (step 4201). After the processing of step 4201, it is determined whether or not the occupant presence / absence determining means has determined the presence or absence of a occupant (step 4202). When it is determined, the display control means 400 displays the occupant list on the display sections 106 and 220 (step 4203), and displays the list displayed in step 4203. From this, it is determined whether or not the user has selected which seat should be used to move the center console unit 200 (step 420), and it is determined that the user has been selected in step 420.
  • each set value corresponding to this selection is stored in the set value selection means 4006 from the storage means 40007. Then, based on the selected set value, the movement control means 408 moves the movement means 409 (step 425). After the processing in step 420, it is determined whether or not the movement has been completed (step 420), and if it is determined in step 420 that the movement has been completed, step 42 0 Return to 1 and repeat the process.
  • step 402. it is determined that the presence or absence of a seated person has not been determined in step 402. In this case, return to step 4201 again and repeat the processing.
  • step 402 If it is determined that the presence or absence of a occupant has been determined in step 402, the process proceeds to step 423, and the determination result of the presence / absence determination means is output to the airbag control means 405. As a result, the operation of the airbag apparatus is in a standby state (step 4207). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the ignition has been turned off (step 408). If it is determined in this step 408 that the ignition has been turned off, the operation control of the airbag device ends. (Step 4209).
  • step 4204 when the setting value selection means 4006 determines that there is no selection operation in step 4204, the process returns to step 4203 again and repeats the processing. If it is determined in step 420 that the movement of the center console unit 200 has not been completed, the process returns to step 420 and repeats the processing.
  • step 408 If it is determined in step 408 that the induction OFF has not been performed, the flow returns to step 428 again to continue the operation standby state of the airbag device.
  • Embodiment 9 since the occupant information used for the airbag device is configured to be effectively used for the movement setting of the mobile device arrangement device, when the user moves between the center unit 200 and the center unit 200. Since the troublesome operation can be reduced to the minimum operation, the operability of the device and the convenience of the device are further improved.
  • FIG. Fig. 43 shows a configuration in which a navigation device is provided in the mobile information processing device.
  • FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example displayed on the device of FIG. 43, and
  • FIG. 45 is a flow chart of the operation of the information processing device for a mobile object shown in FIG. It is a flowchart showing this.
  • an information source such as a receipt is captured by a camera 108 or a camera 250 as an imaging means, and a display unit 106 and a center console unit provided on an instrument panel 102 are provided. This is displayed on the display unit 220 provided in the unit 200, and the reference numeral 430 1 is taken by the cameras 108 and 250, and is output to the visible information and stored in the storage means described later.
  • Reference numeral 01 denotes a storage means for storing dictionary information as visible information to be compared when analyzing the contents of the visible information captured by the cameras 108 and 250. As described in Embodiment 1, figures, symbols, alphabets, hiragana, katakana, and kan , Stores the dictionary information necessary to recognize the character of such numbers.
  • Reference numeral 4303 denotes navigation means for displaying the current position of the vehicle and map information around the current position on the display unit 106 and the display unit 220, and the navigation means 4303 is It can set destinations, search for routes to these destinations, and provide route guidance.
  • Reference numeral 4304 denotes an operation means for performing a predetermined operation on the navigation means 4303, and this operation means 4304 is operated when determining settings such as a destination and a route search. It is a thing.
  • the display control signal of the display control means 4305 is output to the navigation means 4303, and At 303, the display control signal is received, and the result analyzed by the analyzing means 4301 is reflected on the destination setting, route search, route guidance setting, etc., and is again applied to the display controlling means 4305. Output it and display it on the display unit 106 or the display unit 220 ⁇ Using FIG.
  • the navigation means 4303 When the route guidance to the store is to be provided by the navigation means 4303, the contents of the receipt are read by the camera 128 and 250, and the character analysis is performed by the analysis means 4301. . At this time, as shown in the receipt, the address "200, Ichibancho, Tachikawa-shi, Tokyo" is described in the receipt, so the navigation means 4 330 The user is asked whether to set the destination. At this time, the display examples of the display unit 106 and the display unit 220 are as shown in FIG. 44, and if "YES" is selected, the address described on the receipt is set as the destination. In addition, it is possible to set a destination without a user inputting an address or the like, and to perform a route search and a route guidance to the destination after the destination is set.
  • the operation of the apparatus starts (step 450), and it is determined whether or not the camera 128, 250 has read the receipt character information as visible information (step 2). 10 2) If it is determined that the character information has been read, the analysis means 4301 analyzes which character information stored in the storage means 4302 corresponds to the read character information. (Step 2102). In step 2102, the analyzing means 4301 determines whether or not the analyzed content is related information used in the navigation means 4303 (step 4501). If it is determined in step 01 that the information is related to the navigation means 4303, a setting function for setting the navigation means 4303 is displayed (step 4502). this The display example displayed in step 4502 is shown in FIG. Next, the navigation means 4303 determines whether or not a selection operation has been performed on the content displayed in step 4502 (step 4503). This selection operation indicates that “YES” or “N ⁇ ” is selected in the display as shown in FIG.
  • step 4503 If it is determined in step 4503 that the selection operation has been performed, the navigation means 4303 performs a setting operation (step 4504). If the contents are as shown in Fig. 44, the destination is set.
  • the display control means 4305 causes the display section 106 and the display section 220 to display a display of the content including the content set in Step 4504 (Step 4). 505). After the processing in step 4505, the process returns to step 2101, and the processing is repeated thereafter.
  • step 211 If it is determined in step 211 that the visible information has not been read, the process returns to step 211 again and repeats until the reading of the visible information is completed.
  • step 4501 If it is determined in step 4501 that the navigation means 4303 is not character information related to the setting value of the navigation means 4303, the processing proceeds to step 21 shown in FIG. Proceed to 0 0 (step 4506). If it is determined in step 4503 that the selection operation has not been performed, the flow returns to step 4503 again, and the processing is repeated.
  • the position of the store is stored in the navigation device installed in the car, and is easily stored in the future when driving.
  • a good impression such as a store receipt or a map
  • the position of the store is stored in the navigation device installed in the car, and is easily stored in the future when driving.
  • Embodiment 11 1 1.
  • the console units 200 and 220 are automatically moved by the user's operation, but the power source of the vehicle is turned off, that is, When the identification switch is turned off, the center consoles 200 and 220 may be moved to return to a preset position, that is, a default position automatically.
  • the preset position is a position where the user can use lightly, and thus the position is changed by moving the center console units 200 and 220.
  • the position can be reset when the car's induction is turned off and automatically moved to the default position, and the center console unit 200, 220 can be moved each time a user gets on the vehicle. User's convenience without being forced Up.
  • Embodiment 1 2.
  • the center console unit 200, 220 is set at a preset position, that is, the default position.
  • the default position is the seating position of the driver who uses the vehicle most frequently, that is, the driver's seat and the passenger's seat. It may be set at a position sandwiched between them.
  • Embodiment 1 Since the position corresponding to the driver's most frequently used seat is preset as the default position, the convenience of the driver is improved.
  • the information on the display unit 106 provided on the instrument panel 102 and the display unit 22 provided on the center console units 200 and 200 are provided.
  • display unit 250, and display unit 3000, the relationship with the information of the display unit 320 provided was not described. May be provided.
  • the content displayed on one display unit may be displayed on the other display unit using the transmission / reception unit of each other, and the same information may be used by all members, for example, when there are many passengers in the car. Can be used to expand the range of use of the equipment. The convenience of the user is improved.
  • the transmitting and receiving unit may use an infrared ray, a Bluetooth technology, or the like.
  • Embodiment 14 may use an infrared ray, a Bluetooth technology, or the like.
  • the set values of the center console units 200 and 2200 are set as the movement values of the center console units 200 and 2200, the set values of the display unit, and the set values of the operation unit.
  • each set value may be configured with only one type of set value, and the memory capacity of the storage means can be reduced as much as possible. Can also be obtained.
  • the display device for a mobile object according to the present invention can be used for driving a mobile object such as an automobile while maintaining the convenience of the passenger in the rear seat even when the rear view is blocked in the vehicle interior. It is suitable for use as a display device for a mobile object that can always provide a good rear view.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Fittings On The Vehicle Exterior For Carrying Loads, And Devices For Holding Or Mounting Articles (AREA)
  • Closed-Circuit Television Systems (AREA)
  • Studio Devices (AREA)
  • Devices For Indicating Variable Information By Combining Individual Elements (AREA)

Abstract

A display for a moving body comprises a room mirror (2210) for viewing a back image provided near the driver’s seat (121) of an automobile (100), or a moving body, a display unit (2250) foldably disposed behind the room mirror (2210) and between the front seats and the rear seats and adapted to display visual information, and a camera (2280) for picking up the rear image behind the automobile (100). While the display unit (2250) is used, the image picked up by the camera (2280) can be viewed in the room mirror (2210); contrarily while the display unit (2250) is not used, the image cannot be viewed in the room mirror (2210). As a result, even if the rear view is obstructed by the display unit (2250), the rear view can be satisfactorily kept, thereby improving the convenience of the display.

Description

明細書 移動体用表示装置 技術分野  Description Display device for moving object Technical field

この発明は自動車等の移動体に搭載される、 例えばルームミラー等の 表示手段による表示を行う際に、 後方視界が低下する状況下にある場合, 移動体内に配設された撮像手段が撮像した情報を表示手段に表示させ るように構成された移動体用表示装置に関するものである。 背景技術  The present invention is mounted on a moving body such as an automobile. For example, when displaying with a display means such as a rearview mirror or the like, when the rear view is reduced, the imaging means provided in the moving body captures an image. The present invention relates to a mobile display device configured to display information on display means. Background art

第 4 6図は、 従来の自動車における車室内の概略構成を示す概略構 成図である。  FIG. 46 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a cabin of a conventional automobile.

この第 4 6図に示すように、 従来の自動車において、 1は車室内の前 部に設けられたインストウルメントパネル、 2はインストウルメントパ ネル 1の中央部 1 aに設けられたラジオ受信機やカセッ トデッキプレ —ャゃ C Dプレーヤ等のオーディォ、 3はィンストウルメントパネル 1 の中央上部に設けられたダッシュポード、 4はィンストウルメントパネ ル 1の右側に設けられたステアリングホイール、 5は前席であり、 この 前席 5には運転席 5 a、 助手席 5 bとが左右に並べて設けられている。 また、 6は運転席 5 aと助手席 5 bとの間に挟まれた位置に設置され たセンターコンソールボックスである。  As shown in FIG. 46, in a conventional car, 1 is an instrument panel provided at a front portion of a vehicle interior, and 2 is a radio receiver provided at a central portion 1a of an instrument panel 1. Machine, cassette deck player, audio for CD player, etc., 3 is a dash board provided at the upper center of the instrument panel 1, 4 is a steering wheel provided on the right side of the instrument panel 1, 5 Is a front seat, and a driver's seat 5a and a passenger seat 5b are provided in the front seat 5 side by side. Reference numeral 6 denotes a center console box installed between the driver's seat 5a and the passenger's seat 5b.

従来、 オーディォ 2は、 ィンストウルメントパネル 1の中央部 1 aに 設置するように構成したものが主流である。  Conventionally, the audio 2 is configured to be installed at the center 1 a of the instrument panel 1.

一方、 近年になってナビゲーシヨン装置が普及し始め、 運転席や助手 席等の前側座席下にナビゲーシヨン装置本体 (図示せず) を設置して、 ナビゲーション装置から出力される地図情報を表示する表示部をィン ストウルメントパネル 1の中央部近傍に設置したり、 オーディォの設置 スペースを小さくして、 表示部をィンストウルメン卜パネル 1の中央部 上方に設置、即ち、ダッシュポード 3の中に埋設するようにしたものや、 また、 インストウルメントパネル 1の運転席側に設置されていた制動系 の状態を示す計器類をィンストウルメントパネル 1の中央部に設置す るように構成したものが出始めており、 このような構成が今後の主流に なりつつある。 On the other hand, in recent years, navigation devices have begun to spread, and a navigation device body (not shown) has been installed under front seats such as a driver's seat and a passenger seat. A display for displaying the map information output from the navigation device is installed near the center of the instrument panel 1, or the installation space for the audio is reduced, and the display is placed above the center of the instrument panel 1. Installation, that is, buried in the dashboard 3 and instruments indicating the state of the braking system installed on the driver's seat side of the instrument panel 1 are installed on the instrument panel 1. Some are being configured to be installed in the center, and such a configuration is becoming the mainstream in the future.

また、 表示部の設置においては、 インストウルメントパネル 1の中央 部上方に設置、 即ち、 ダッシュポ一ド 3の中に埋設するように構成した ものや、 運転席 5 aや助手席 5 bの上部であるヘッドレスト (頭部支承 部) に支持部を介して表示部を設けるように構成したものがある。  In addition, the display unit is installed above the central part of the instrument panel 1, that is, buried in the dashboard 3, or above the driver's seat 5a or the passenger seat 5b. There is a configuration in which a display unit is provided on a headrest (head support unit) via a support unit.

さらに、 天井部の前席と後席との中間付近に固定されたモニタ部を設 け、 後席の搭乗者がモニタ部を利用してテレビやビデオ、 D V D等の映 像を表示可能に構成したものもある。  In addition, a monitor is fixed around the ceiling between the front and rear seats so that passengers in the rear can use the monitor to display TV, video, DVD, and other images. Some have done it.

このような背景のもと、 特開平 1 0— 2 9 7 3 9 1号公報において、 従来、 インストウルメントパネル 1の中央部に設置されていたオーディ ォ装置やエアコン等のスィツチ類を運転席と助手席との間に設置され たセン夕一コンソール 6に設けたものが記載されており、 第 4 7図は、 この要部を示す要部構成図である。  Against this background, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H10-2977391 discloses that a switch such as an audio device or an air conditioner, which is conventionally installed in the center of the instrument panel 1, is placed in a driver's seat. What is installed on the console 6 between the passenger seat and the passenger seat is described. Fig. 47 is a main part configuration diagram showing this main part.

第 4 7図において、 1は車室内の前部に設けられたィンストウルメン トパネル、 3はィンストウルメントパネル 1の中央上部に設けられたダ ッシユボード、 4はィンストウルメン卜パネル 1の右側に設けられたス テアリングホイ一ル、 5は前席であり、 この前席 5には運転席 5 a、 助 手席 5 bとが左右に並べて設けられている。  In FIG. 47, reference numeral 1 denotes an instrument panel provided at the front of the passenger compartment, 3 denotes a dash board provided at an upper center of the instrument panel 1, and 4 denotes a right side of the instrument panel 1. The steering wheel 5 is a front seat, and the front seat 5 is provided with a driver's seat 5a and a passenger seat 5b side by side.

6は運転席 5 aと助手席 5 bとの間に挟まれた位置に設置されたセ ン夕一コンソールボックス、 7はィンストウルメントパネル 1の中央下 部に設けられたギアチェンジレバー、 8はインストウルメントパネル 1 の中央上部に設けられたディスプレイである。 Reference numeral 6 denotes a cell installed between the driver's seat 5a and the passenger's seat 5b. 7 is a gear change lever provided at the lower center of the instrument panel 1, and 8 is a display provided at the upper center of the instrument panel 1.

また、 第 4 8図に示すように、 センターコンソールボックス 6には蓋 6 aを設け、 この蓋 6 aにより開閉される収納部がセンタ一コンソール ボックス 6内部に形成されている。  Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the center console box 6 is provided with a lid 6a, and a storage section opened and closed by the lid 6a is formed inside the center console box 6.

さらに、 センターコンソールボックス 6の前方の一部に、 凹部状に形 成されたスィツチ配設部 9が設けられており、 このスィツチ配設部 9に リモコンュニット 1 0が着脱可能に嵌着されるように構成されている。 このように構成したことにより、 自動車の運転席や助手席に座ってい る搭乗者が通常の着座姿勢のまま簡単にスィツチ操作することができ るものである。  Further, a switch mounting portion 9 formed in a concave shape is provided in a part of the front of the center console box 6, and a remote control unit 10 is detachably fitted to the switch mounting portion 9. It is configured to: With this configuration, a passenger sitting in a driver's seat or a passenger seat of a car can easily perform a switch operation in a normal sitting posture.

また、 実願平 4— 8 6 6 3 8号 (実開平 6— 4 9 2 2 0号公報) にお いて、 バスの車内に装備されるテレビ受信機、 温冷蔵庫等の乗客サーピ ス用備品及び乗客用飲食物の物品を車内前後に移動するための搬送ケ ースを示しており、 第 4 9図はこの装置の概略構成を示した概略構成図、 第 5 0図はテレビ受信機が搬送ケ一ス内に収納された状態の断面図で ある。  In addition, in Japanese Utility Model Application No. 4-866638 (Japanese Utility Model Application No. 6-49220), equipment for passenger services such as a television receiver and a hot refrigerator installed in the bus car. And a transportation case for moving food and drink items for passengers back and forth in the vehicle. FIG. 49 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of this device, and FIG. 50 is a television receiver. It is sectional drawing of the state accommodated in the transport case.

第 4 9図、 第 5 0図において、 2 1は収納ケース 2 5 (後述する) の 一面に配設されたテレビ受信機の表示部、 2 2は移動体としてのパス、 2 3はバス 2 2に設置されたシート、 2 4はバス 2 2の天井の略中央部 に設けられたレール、 2 5はレール 2 4に移動可能に吊り下げられた搬 送ケース、 2 6はレ一ル 2 4に搬送ケース 2 5が摺動支持されるローラ 部である。  In FIG. 49 and FIG. 50, reference numeral 21 denotes a display unit of a television receiver disposed on one side of a storage case 25 (described later), 22 denotes a path as a moving body, and 23 denotes a bus 2 2 is a rail provided at the approximate center of the ceiling of the bus 22, 25 is a transport case suspended movably on the rail 24, and 26 is a rail 2. 4 is a roller section on which a transfer case 25 is slidably supported.

このように構成したことにより、 テレビ受信機等の乗客サービス用備 品又は乗客飲食物等の物品を収納した搬送ケースが車内で簡単に移動 でき、 備品や飲食物等が不要な際は、 乗客の視界障害を解消するととも に飲食物等の物品を各乗客に簡単に配ることができるものである。 With this configuration, the transport case containing passenger service equipment such as a television receiver or articles such as passenger food and drink can easily move in the vehicle. When equipment and food and drinks are not required, it is possible to eliminate obstacles to passengers' visibility and to easily distribute food and drinks to each passenger.

さらにまた、 特開平 1 1一 7 8 6 9 3号公報において、 自動車のルー ムミラー本体にモニタを内設した車両用監視装置が示されており、 第 5 1図はこの装置の要部構成を示した分解斜視図であり、 第 5 2図は要 部構成の断面を示した要部断面図、 第 5 3図は要部への表示例を示した 説明図である。  Further, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-78693 discloses a vehicle monitoring device in which a monitor is provided inside a room mirror body of an automobile, and FIG. 51 shows a main configuration of this device. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view shown in FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of a main part showing a cross section of a main part configuration, and FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of display on the main part.

これら第 5 1図、 第 5 2図、 第 5 3図において、 ルームミラー本体 3 0は、 車体の運転席の前方の車室内天井面に設置されており、 このルー ムミラ一本体 3 0は、 車体の後方を写すパックミラーの機能と、 車体の 後方を撮影するリァ撮像カメラのリァモニタの機能を有しており、 構造 としては、 筐体 3 1と、 モニタ 3 2と、 ハーフミラー 3 3と、 枠体 3 4 と、 ァ一ム 3 5とで構成されており、 モニタ 3 2の電源が投入され、 ギ ァチェンジでリバースにした際、 第 5 3図に示すような表示がモニタ 3 2になされる。 この第 5 3図では、 左右 2画面に分割され、 右側には力 メラで撮影された後方映像を表示し、 左側には注意事項が表示されるよ うになつている。  In FIGS. 51, 52 and 53, the rearview mirror body 30 is installed on the ceiling surface of the cabin in front of the driver's seat of the vehicle body. It has the function of a pack mirror that captures the rear of the vehicle body and the function of a rear monitor of a rear imaging camera that captures the rear of the vehicle body.The structure is as follows: housing 31, monitor 32, half mirror 33 When the monitor 32 is powered on and reverses by gear change, the display shown in Fig. 53 appears on the monitor 32. Done. In Fig. 53, the screen is divided into two screens on the left and right, the rear image taken with the camera is displayed on the right, and notes are displayed on the left.

このように構成したことにより、 リァ撮像カメラからの映像を確認す ることで、 車体の後方を視認することができるものである。  With this configuration, it is possible to visually check the rear of the vehicle body by checking the image from the rear imaging camera.

さらに、 従来の自動車においては、 バックミラー (ルームミラ一) が 運転席近傍の天井部に取り付けられ、 追い越し確認や車線変更等を行う など自動車の後方を確認する際、 バックミラーにより後方の状況を写し 出されたものを見て運転者は後方を確認できるようになっているが、 バ ックミラーより後方の車室内において後方視界を遮るものがある場合、 バックミラーにより後方確認がし難くなることがある。 例えば、 配送専 用車のように運転席後方に多量の荷物を搭載した状態にあっては、 バッ クミラ一と車両後部の窓 (リアウィンドウ) の間が荷物によって後方視 界が遮られることが多い。 Furthermore, in conventional vehicles, a rearview mirror (room mirror) is mounted on the ceiling near the driver's seat, and when the driver checks the rear of the vehicle, such as when checking for passing or changing lanes, the rearview mirror reflects the situation behind the vehicle. The driver is able to see behind the vehicle by looking at the output, but if there is something obstructing the rear view in the cabin behind the back mirror, the rearview mirror may make it difficult to see behind. . For example, if you have a large amount of luggage behind the driver's seat like a delivery car, Luggage often blocks the rear view between the Kumira and the rear window of the vehicle.

このような背景のもと、 上記問題を解決するために、 特開平 4一 7 1 9 3 9号公報に記載の装置が提案されており、 第 5 4図は、 この公報に 示された要部を示す要部説明図である。  Against this background, an apparatus described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. Hei 4-71939 has been proposed in order to solve the above-mentioned problems. FIG. It is a principal part explanatory view showing a part.

第 5 4図において、 この装置は、 車両の後部に車両後方の視界を十分 確保できる位置に撮像装置 (図示せず) を設けるとともに、 車両の運転 席の天井部に撮像装置で撮像された映像をフロントガラスに向って映 写する表示装置 4 1と、 この表示装置 4 1により映写された映像を運転 者の視界に入るよう反射させる反射鏡 4 2とを配設して構成したもの であり、 このように構成することにより車室内の荷物等により後方視界 が遮られても常時、 後方の映像を運転者に見せることができるように構 成されている。  In Fig. 54, this device is equipped with an image pickup device (not shown) at the rear of the vehicle at a position where the field of view behind the vehicle can be sufficiently secured, and an image taken by the image pickup device on the ceiling of the driver's seat of the vehicle. And a reflecting mirror 42 that reflects the image projected by the display device 41 into the driver's field of view. With this configuration, even if the rear view is obstructed by luggage or the like in the vehicle cabin, the driver can always see the rear image.

一方、 車室内で後席の搭乗者が利用できるディスプレイを備えた車両 用後方確認装置が特開平 1 1 一 1 2 9 8 1 5号公報に提案されており、 この公報に示された要部の使用状態を示す要部説明図を第 5 5図に示 す。 この第 5 5図において、 車両の後退ギヤが操作されると O Nするリ バーススィツチ 5 1と、 車両の後方死角を撮影する C C Dカメラ 5 2と、 テレビ放送受信用のアンテナ 5 3と、 テレビチューナ 5 4と、 後席乗員 用のテレビ操作スィッチ 5 5と、 前锋席の中間部の天井近くの位置に配 置された液晶ディスプレイ 5 6と、 この液晶ディスプレイを車両の天井 部から支持し、 かつ液晶ディスプレイの画面の向きを運転席側、 後席乗 員側に回転駆動する電気モータで成るディスプレイ駆動部 5 7と、 これ らの各機器の動作を制御する制御部 5 8とから構成されている。  On the other hand, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. H11-11298015 has proposed a rear-view device for vehicles equipped with a display that can be used by passengers in the rear seats in the passenger compartment. Fig. 55 is an explanatory diagram of the main parts showing the use state of the device. In Fig. 55, a reverse switch 51 that is turned on when the reverse gear of the vehicle is operated, a CCD camera 52 that captures the rear blind spot of the vehicle, an antenna 53 for receiving TV broadcasts, and a TV tuner 54, a TV operation switch for rear seat occupants 55, a liquid crystal display 56 arranged near the ceiling in the middle of the front seat, and supporting the liquid crystal display from the ceiling of the vehicle, and It is composed of a display drive unit 57 composed of an electric motor that rotates the LCD screen to the driver's seat side and the rear passenger side, and a control unit 58 that controls the operation of these devices. I have.

このように構成したことにより、 車室内から窓ガラス越しに車両後方、 側方を確認できる車両において、 運転手が車両を後退させる時に車両後 方を向くことで、 車両後方の死角部分については後方を向いたまま、 視 線をディスプレイの方に移動させ、 その表示内容を見て確認することが できるようになり、 後退運転時の後方確認のための運転手の負担を軽減 させることができるものである。 With this configuration, a vehicle that allows the driver to check the rear and side of the vehicle from the passenger compartment through the window glass, By turning your eyes, you can move your line of sight to the display while looking at the blind spot behind the vehicle, and check the displayed contents. This can reduce the driver's burden for driving.

また、 従来、 自動車で外出する際に買物をすることもよくあり、 買物 をした際に店員から手渡されるレシートを自宅まで持ち帰って自宅で 家計簿を付けたり、 気に入つたお店があった際などは、 メモしておくな どのことで対応していた。  In addition, in the past, people often shop when going out by car, and when they go shopping, they take the receipt handed by the clerk back to their homes and keep a household account book at home, or when there is a shop they like. Responded by taking notes.

さらに、 ナビゲ一シヨン装置にて観光ガイドブック等を見ながら気に 入った場所を目的地に設定する際は、 使用者が幾つもの階層から構成さ れているメニュー画面を逐一操作にて設定していた。  In addition, when setting a favorite place as a destination while viewing a sightseeing guidebook or the like with the navigation device, the user sets a menu screen composed of several layers by one operation. I was

従来の自動車用音響装置や映像再生装置は、 以上のように自動車内に 取り付けられ固定されている、 即ち、 移動不可能なようにインストウル メントパネルの中央部付近に設置されていることが多く、 こうように構 成されたものにおいては、 インストウルメントパネルの中央部では設置 スペースが限られているため、 このスペースに設置する装置を使用者が 厳選する必要があり、 特に、 自動車内で多種多様な音響装置や映像再生 装置等を利用したいユーザにとって選択自由度が低いなど利便性が悪 いという問題があった。  Conventional automotive audio and video playback devices are mounted and fixed inside the vehicle as described above, that is, they are often installed near the center of the instrument panel so that they cannot be moved. However, in such a configuration, the installation space is limited in the center of the instrument panel, so it is necessary for the user to carefully select the equipment to be installed in this space, especially in automobiles. For a user who wants to use a variety of audio devices and video playback devices, there is a problem in that convenience is poor such as a low degree of freedom in selection.

また、 インストウルメン卜パネルの中央部に音響装置を設置している ために、 特に、 カセットテ一プ、 D A T、 C D、 M D、 D V D等の記録 媒体の交換や、 各装置の設定操作や複数の装置を同時に設定操作するこ となどは、 前席である運転席と助手席の着座者しか行なうことができず、 前席の着座者以外、 即ち、 後席の着座者は着座している状態では上記し たようなことが行なえず、 後席の着座者の利便性が極めて悪いという問 題があった。 また、 インストウルメントパネルの中央部に映像再生装置等からの可 視情報を表示する表示手段を設置するものにおいて、 前席の着座者には 視認性が高いが、 後席の着座者にとって表示手段から離れるために、 視 認性が低下するという問題があつた。 In addition, since the sound device is installed in the center of the instrument panel, it is particularly necessary to change recording media such as cassette tape, DAT, CD, MD, DVD, etc. Only the occupants in the driver's seat and the front passenger seat can perform the setting operation of the device at the same time. However, the above-mentioned situation cannot be performed, and the convenience of the rear seated passengers is extremely low. In addition, a display means for displaying visual information from a video playback device or the like is installed in the center of the instrument panel. The visibility is high for occupants in the front seat, but is displayed for occupants in the rear seat. There was a problem that visibility was reduced due to leaving the means.

また、 音響装置や映像再生装置の操作をする際、 通常、 これらの操作 手段は装置と一体に構成されているため、 ィンストウルメントパネルの 中央部に手を伸ばして操作する必要があり、 後席の着座者は操作できな い上、 前席の着座者でさえも、 シートにもたれた姿勢から前かがみの姿 勢に変えて操作しなければならず、 手軽に操作を行なえないという問題 があった。  In addition, when operating an audio device or a video playback device, since these operation means are usually integrated with the device, it is necessary to reach the center of the instrument panel to operate. The rear seats cannot be operated, and even the front seats must be operated by changing from leaning on the seat to leaning forward, making it difficult to operate easily. there were.

また、 操作手段をリモートコントローラ (以下、 リモコンと称す) と して装置から離脱するものもあるが、 このような構成のものは、 リモコ ンによる操作の後、 リモコンを収納箇所から離脱させたままにしておく ことが多々あり、 リモコンは通常、 小型なものであるため、 操作手段の 行方が分からなくなり、 操作する際、 リモコンを探さなければならない ことに陥ったりする問題もあった。  In some cases, the operating means is detached from the device as a remote controller (hereinafter, referred to as a remote controller). In such a configuration, the remote controller is detached from the storage location after the remote control operation. In many cases, the remote control is usually small, so it is difficult to find out where the operating means is, and there is a problem that the user must search for the remote control when operating.

また、 音響機器や映像再生機器等は、 インストウルメントパネルの中 央部に設置され、 インストウルメントパネル内で配線等の接続が行なわ れるように固定されているため、 狭いスペースしかないィンストウルメ ントパネルにおいて、 設置したい機器数が限定され、 設置する際は、 よ り機器を厳選する必要があり、 装置の発展性を低下させ、 使用者の利便 性が低下するという問題があつた。  In addition, audio equipment and video playback equipment are installed in the center of the instrument panel and fixed so that wiring and other connections can be made within the instrument panel. However, the number of devices to be installed was limited, and it was necessary to select the devices more carefully when installing the devices, which reduced the development of the devices and reduced the convenience for users.

さらに、 ィンストウルメントパネルの中央部に表示手段とともに、 こ の表示手段の表示内容を操作するための夕ツチパネル等の操作手段が 設けられているため、 この操作手段を操作する際において、 操作手段へ の操作を行なう際は、 シートにもたれた姿勢から前かがみの姿勢に変え て操作するか、 もしくは、 手を伸ばして操作しなければならず、 手軽に 操作を行なえないという問題があった。 Further, since an operation means such as a touch panel for operating the display content of the display means is provided in the center of the instrument panel together with the display means, when operating the operation means, When manipulating the means, change the posture from leaning on the seat to the leaning posture. Operation must be performed by hand, or the user must reach for the operation, which makes it difficult to perform the operation easily.

また、 移動体の中でもパスなどのように座席間が搭乗者の通路になつ ている場合、 フロアは搭乗者の通行を妨げるため、 何も設置できないと いう問題があった。  In addition, there is also a problem that if the space between the seats is a passenger's passage such as a pass even in a moving object, no floor can be installed because the floor blocks the passenger's passage.

一方、 バスの天井部に設けたレール部に吊り下げて配設したテレビ受 信機がバスの前後方向に移動可能に構成されているものもあるが、 車内 に設置されている座席位置とテレビ受信機の移動停止位置との関係を 持たせているものではないため、 使用者が着座している座席に対応した 位置になるようテレビ受信機の位置を使用者が使用する度にテレビ受 信機の移動を調整しながら停止しなければならず、 使用者の利便性が悪 いという問題があった。 '  On the other hand, some TV receivers are mounted on rails provided on the ceiling of the bus so that they can be moved in the front-rear direction of the bus. It does not have a relationship with the movement stop position of the receiver, so each time the user uses the position of the TV receiver so that the position corresponds to the seat where the user is sitting, the TV reception There was a problem that the user had to stop while adjusting the movement of the aircraft, which was inconvenient for the user. '

また、 後席の着座者がテレビ受信機を使用しない場合でも、 常に単独 で配置されているために、 運転者などの搭乗者の邪魔になるという問題 があった。  In addition, even if the rear seat occupant does not use the television receiver, the rear seat is always located alone, which has a problem that it obstructs the driver and other passengers.

さらに、 ルームミラーより後方の天井部に突出物がある場合、 この突 出物によりルームミラーの後方視界が遮られ、 運転者が後方確認をしに くくなるという問題があり、 また、 このような状況は、 後退時だけでな く、 通常の走行開始時や走行時の車線変更や右左折時など、 即ち、 後方 確認が必要な場合に発生するという問題があった。  Furthermore, if there is a protruding object on the ceiling behind the rearview mirror, the protruding object obstructs the rear view of the rearview mirror, making it difficult for the driver to check the rear view. The situation was not only when the vehicle was backing up, but also at the start of normal driving, when changing lanes during driving, when making a right or left turn, etc., that is, there was a problem that it occurred when it was necessary to check the rear.

しかしながら、 従来は車両の運転席の天井部に撮像装置で撮影された 映像を.フロン卜ガラスに向って映写する表示装置と、 この表示装置によ り映写された映像を運転者の視界に入るよう反射させる反射鏡とで構 成しているため、 後方の映像を反射鏡で見る際は、 常時、 撮像装置で撮 影された後方映像を見ることになり、 車内の後部座席等に荷物がない際、 即ち、 後方視界が良好な場合でも、 撮像装置及び表示装置が動作してい るため、 消費電力が発生し、 車載パッテリがあがりやすいという問題が あった。 However, conventionally, a display device that projects an image captured by an imaging device on the ceiling of a driver's seat of a vehicle toward a front glass, and an image projected by the display device enters a driver's view. When viewing the rear image with a reflector, the user always sees the rear image captured by the imaging device, and luggage is stored in the rear seats in the car. When there is not, that is, even when the rear view is good, the imaging device and the display device are operating. As a result, there is a problem that power consumption is generated and the in-vehicle battery easily rises.

また、 従来は運転手が車両を後退させる時に車両後方を向いたまま、 視線を前後席の中間部の天井近くに設けたディスプレイの方に移動さ せ、 その表示内容を見て確認することができるよう構成しているため、 ディスプレイの画面の向きを運転席側、 後席乗員側に回転駆動させるデ イスクプレイ駆動部が必要になり、 部品点数が多くなるという問題があ つた。  Conventionally, when the driver moves the vehicle backward, the driver's gaze is moved to the display located near the ceiling in the middle of the front and rear seats while looking at the rear of the vehicle, and the displayed contents can be checked. Because of this configuration, a display drive unit that rotates the screen of the display toward the driver's seat and the rear occupant was required, and the number of parts increased.

また、 車両を後退させる場合は、 後席の搭乗者が前後席の中間部の天 井近くに設けたディスプレイの内容を見て楽しんでいても、 ディスプレ ィの画面を運転席側に回転させるため、 この間、 後席の搭乗者はデイス プレイを利用できなくなり、 後席の搭乗者の利便性が悪くなるという問 題があった。  In addition, when the vehicle is moved backward, even if the passenger in the rear seat enjoys watching the contents of the display provided near the ceiling in the middle of the front and rear seats, the display screen is rotated to the driver's seat side. During this time, the rear passengers could not use the display and the rear passengers became inconvenienced.

また、 自動車で外出した際に買物をした時に受け取るレシートなどの 情報を整理し、 処理することは作業が煩雑で面倒になることが多いとい う問題があった。  Another problem was that organizing and processing information such as receipts received when shopping when going out of a car was complicated and often cumbersome.

さらに、 ナビゲーシヨン装置において気に入った店の住所をレシ一ト や観光ガイドブック等から使用者が読み取り、 使用者の操作によって住 所設定等を行なう必要があり、 操作が煩雑で面倒になることが多いとい う問題があった。  Furthermore, it is necessary for the user to read the address of the favorite shop on the navigation device from a receipt or a sightseeing guidebook, and to set the address by operating the user, so that the operation is complicated and troublesome. There was a problem that there were many.

この発明は、 かかる問題を解決するためになされたもので、 移動体に 設けられ、映像を撮影する撮像手段と、移動体の運転席近傍に設けられ、 移動体の後方映像を表示する第 1表示手段と、 収納可能に形成され、 移 動体内で第 1表示手段の設置位置より後方に設けられるとともに、 所望 の映像を表示する第 2表示手段と、 この第 2表示手段の収納状態を判断 する収納状態判断手段と、 この収納状態判断手段が第 2表示手段は収納 されていないと判断した場合、 第 1表示手段は撮像手段が撮影した映像 を表示させるように表示制御を行う表示制御手段とを備えたので、 第 2 表示手段の収納状態に関わらず、 常時、 移動体の後方視界を良好にする ことができ、 使用者の利便性が向上する移動体用表示装置を得ることを 目的とする。 The present invention has been made in order to solve such a problem, and an image pickup means provided on a moving body to capture an image, and a first means provided near a driver's seat of the moving body and displaying a rear image of the moving body. Display means, formed so as to be stowable, provided in the movable body behind the installation position of the first display means, and displaying a desired image, and judging a storage state of the second display means. Storage state determining means for performing storage, and the storage state determining means If the first display means is determined not to have been performed, the first display means is provided with display control means for performing display control so as to display the image taken by the imaging means. It is an object of the present invention to provide a display device for a mobile body that can improve the rear view of the mobile body and improve user convenience.

また、 この発明は、 撮像手段にて移動体の後方映像を撮影し、 表示制 御手段にて撮影手段が撮影した後方映像を第 1表示手段に表示させる ようにしたことにより、 第 2表示手段の収納状態に関わらず、 常時、 移 動体の後方視界を良好にすることができ、 使用者の利便性が向上する移 動体用表示装置を得ることを目的とする。  Also, the present invention is characterized in that the rear view image of the moving body is photographed by the imaging means, and the rear view image photographed by the photographing means is displayed by the display control means on the first display means. It is an object of the present invention to provide a display device for a moving body, which can always improve the rear view of the moving body irrespective of the storage state of the moving body and improve the convenience for the user.

また、 この発明は、 第 1表示手段は鏡部と導通すると表示される表示 部とのそれぞれを有し、 表示制御手段は収納状態判断手段の判断により 第 2表示手段が収納されていると判断した場合は、 表示制御動作を行な わずに第 1表示手段に設けた鏡部にて後方映像を写し出すようにし、 第 2表示手段が収納されていないと判断した場合は、 表示制御動作を行い、 第 1表示手段に設けた表示部が導通され、 この表示部にて撮像手段が撮 影した映像を表示するようにしたので、 簡素な構成で移動体の後方視界 をより良好にし、 現在ある部品を流用できるので、 部品点数を削減する ことができる移動体用表示装置を得ることを目的とする。  Further, according to the present invention, the first display means has a display section which is displayed when the first display means is electrically connected to the mirror section, and the display control means determines that the second display means is stored by the storage state determination means. In this case, the display control operation is not performed and the rear image is projected by the mirror provided on the first display means.If it is determined that the second display means is not stored, the display control operation is performed. Then, the display unit provided in the first display unit is turned on, and the image taken by the imaging unit is displayed on the display unit, so that the rear view of the moving body is improved with a simple configuration, It is an object of the present invention to provide a display device for a moving body that can reduce the number of components because certain components can be used.

また、 この発明は、 第 2表示手段を折り畳み可能に移動体の天井部に 設け、 収納状態判断手段は、 第 2表示手段が天井部に略平行に折り畳ま れた際は収納されたと判断し、 第 2表示手段が天井部から下方に突出す る状態の際は収納されていないと判断するようにしたので、 第 2表示手 段の収納状態の検知が簡単に行なえ、 簡素な部品で構成できるので、 コ スト削減が図れる移動体用表示装置を得ることを目的とする。  Further, the present invention provides the second display means provided on the ceiling of the movable body so as to be foldable, and the storage state determination means determines that the second display means is stored when the second display means is folded substantially parallel to the ceiling, When the second display means protrudes downward from the ceiling, it is determined that it is not stored, so that the storage state of the second display means can be easily detected and can be configured with simple components. Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a display device for a moving object that can reduce costs.

また、 この発明は、 撮像手段と第 2表示手段とを一体に形成し、 この 一体形成したュニッ卜を移動体内の第 1表示手段より後方の天井部に 設けたので、 天井部に取り付ける際、 ユニットとして取り付けるので、 装置の取付工数を削減でき、 コスト削減が図れる移動体用表示装置を得 ることを目的とする。 In addition, according to the present invention, the imaging means and the second display means are integrally formed, Since the unit formed integrally is provided on the ceiling behind the first display means in the moving body, it is mounted as a unit when it is mounted on the ceiling, so the man-hour for mounting the device can be reduced and the display for the moving body can be reduced in cost The purpose is to obtain the device.

また、 この発明は、 映像を撮影する撮像手段と、 移動体の運転席近傍 に設けられ、 移動体の後方映像を表示する第 1表示手段と、 収納可能に 形成され、 移動体内で第 1表示手段の設置位置より後方に設けられると ともに、 所望の映像を表示する第 2表示手段と、 撮像手段に対し、 映像 を撮像させるとともに、 この映像を出力するよう指令する指令手段と、 この指令手段からの指令に基づき、 撮像手段が映像を撮像し、 この映像 を出力するよう動作制御を行う撮影制御手段と、 この撮影制御手段が出 力した映像情報を送信する送信手段と、 この送信手段が送信した映像情 報を受信する受信手段と、 この受信手段が受信した映像情報を表示する 第 3表示手段とを備えたので、 第 2表示手段の収納状態に関わらず、 撮 像手段で撮影した映像の内容を表示させることができ、 装置の使用範囲 が向上し、 装置の利便性が向上する移動体用表示装置を得ることを目的 とする。  Also, the present invention provides imaging means for photographing an image, first display means provided near the driver's seat of the moving object, and displaying a rear image of the moving object, and formed so as to be stowable, and the first display in the moving object. Second display means for displaying a desired image while being provided behind the installation position of the means, command means for instructing the image pickup means to pick up an image and outputting the image, and this command means The image capturing means captures an image based on a command from the camera and controls the operation so as to output the image. The image capturing means transmits the image information output by the image capturing control means. Since there is provided a receiving means for receiving the transmitted video information and a third display means for displaying the video information received by the receiving means, regardless of the storage state of the second display means, the image is taken by the imaging means. It is an object of the present invention to obtain a display device for a mobile object that can display the contents of a video that has been displayed, improves the range of use of the device, and improves the convenience of the device.

また、 この発明は撮像手段を 3 6 0 ° 回動可能に形成するとともに、 指令に基づいて撮像手段の撮影方向を変更する撮影方向変更手段を設 け、 移動体の周辺映像及び移動体内の映像を撮影可能にしたので、 装置 の使用範囲がさらに向上し、 装置の利便性がさらに向上する移動体用表 示装置を得ることを目的とする。  In addition, the present invention is configured such that the imaging means is formed so as to be rotatable by 360 °, and imaging direction changing means for changing the imaging direction of the imaging means based on a command is provided. An object of the present invention is to provide a display device for a mobile object in which the use range of the device can be further improved and the convenience of the device can be further improved.

また、 この発明は、 移動体外に指令手段と受信手段と第 3表示手段と を有した通信手段を設けたので、 移動体外でも移動体の状態を常時監視 でき、 盗難や悪戯防止を図ることができる移動体用表示装置を得ること を目的とする。 さらに、 この発明は、 撮像手段と第 2表示手段とを一体に形成し、 こ の一体形成したュニッ 卜を移動体内の第 1表示手段より後方の天井部 に設けたので、天井部に取り付ける際、ュニットとして取り付けるので、 装置の取付工数を削減でき、 コスト削減が図れる移動体用表示装置を得 ることを目的とする。 発明の開示 Further, according to the present invention, since the communication means having the command means, the receiving means, and the third display means is provided outside the moving body, the state of the moving body can be constantly monitored outside the moving body, and theft and mischief can be prevented. It is an object of the present invention to obtain a display device for a mobile object that can be used. Further, according to the present invention, the imaging means and the second display means are integrally formed, and the integrally formed unit is provided on the ceiling portion behind the first display means in the movable body, so that the unit is attached to the ceiling portion. The purpose of the present invention is to provide a mobile display device that can reduce the man-hours required for mounting the device and reduce costs. Disclosure of the invention

この発明に係る移動体用表示装置は、 移動体に設けられ、 映像を撮影 する撮像手段と、 移動体の運転席近傍に設けられ、 移動体の後方映像を 表示する第 1表示手段と、 収納可能に形成され、 移動体内で第 1表示手 段の設置位置より後方に設けられるとともに、 所望の映像を表示する第 A display device for a moving body according to the present invention includes: an imaging unit provided on the moving body to capture an image; a first display unit provided near a driver's seat of the moving body to display a rear image of the moving body; It is formed so as to be able to be provided behind the installation position of the first display means in the moving body, and displays a desired image.

2表示手段と、 この第 2表示手段の収納状態を判断する収納状態判断手 段と、 この収納状態判断手段が第 2表示手段は収納されていないと判断 した場合、 第 1表示手段は撮像手段が撮影した映像を表示させるように 表示制御を行う表示制御手段とを備えたので、 第 2表示手段の収納状態 に関わらず、 常時、 移動体の後方視界を良好にすることができ、 使用者 の利便性が向上する。 (2) display means, storage state determination means for determining the storage state of the second display means, and when the storage state determination means determines that the second display means is not stored, the first display means is an imaging means. Display control means for performing display control so as to display the video taken by the user, so that the rear view of the moving body can always be improved regardless of the storage state of the second display means, The convenience of is improved.

また、 この発明に係る移動体用表示装置は、 撮像手段にて移動体の後 方映像を撮影し、 表示制御手段にて撮影手段が撮影した後方映像を第 1 表示手段に表示させるようにしたことにより、 第 2表示手段の収納状態 に関わらず、 常時、 移動体の後方視界を良好にすることができ、 使用者 の利便性が向上する。  Further, in the display device for a moving object according to the present invention, the rearward image captured by the imaging means is displayed on the first display means by the imaging means, and the rear image captured by the imaging means is displayed by the display control means. Thereby, regardless of the storage state of the second display means, the rear view of the moving body can always be improved, and the convenience for the user can be improved.

また、 この発明に係る移動体用表示装置は、 第 1表示手段は鏡部と導 通すると表示される表示部とのそれぞれを有し、 表示制御手段は収納状 態判断手段の判断により第 2表示手段が収納されていると判断した場 合は、 表示制御動作を行なわずに第 1表示手段に設けた鏡部にて後方映 像を写し出すようにし、 第 2表示手段が収納されていないと判断した場 合は、 表示制御動作を行い、 第 1表示手段に設けた表示部が導通され、 この表示部にて撮像手段が撮影した映像を表示するようにしたので、 簡 素な構成で移動体の後方視界をより良好にし、 現在ある部品を流用でき るので、 部品点数を削減することができる。 Further, in the display device for a moving body according to the present invention, the first display means has a mirror section and a display section which is displayed when the display section is guided, and the display control section determines the second state by the judgment of the storage state judgment section. If it is determined that the display means is housed, the display control operation is not performed and the rear projection is performed by the mirror provided in the first display means. An image is projected, and if it is determined that the second display means is not housed, a display control operation is performed, the display unit provided in the first display means is turned on, and the image pickup means takes a picture with this display unit. Since the displayed image is displayed, the rear view of the moving object can be improved with a simple configuration, and the existing components can be used, so that the number of components can be reduced.

また、 この発明に係る移動体用表示装置は、 第 2表示手段を折り畳み 可能に移動体の天井部に設け、 収納状態判断手段は、 第 2表示手段が天 井部に略平行に折り畳まれた際は収納されたと判断し、 第 2表示手段が 天井部から下方に突出する状態の際は収納されていないと判断するよ うにしたので、 第 2表示手段の収納状態の検知が簡単に行なえ、 簡素な 部品で構成できるので、 コスト削減が図れる。  In the display device for a moving body according to the present invention, the second display means may be provided on a ceiling portion of the moving body so as to be foldable, and the storage state determining means may be such that the second display means is folded substantially parallel to the ceiling portion. When the second display means protrudes downward from the ceiling, it is determined that it is not stored, so that the storage state of the second display means can be easily detected, The cost can be reduced because it can be composed of simple components.

また、 この発明に係る移動体用表示装置は、 撮像手段と第 2表示手段 とを一体に形成し、 この一体形成したュニットを移動体内の第 1表示手 段より後方の天井部に設けたので、 天井部に取り付ける際、 ユニットと して取り付けるので、装置の取付工数を削減でき、 コスト削減が図れる。 また、 この発明に係る移動体用表示装置は、 映像を撮影する撮像手段 と、 移動体の運転席近傍に設けられ、 移動体の後方映像を表示する第 1 表示手段と、 収納可能に形成され、 移動体内で第 1表示手段の設置位置 より後方に設けられるとともに、 所望の映像を表示する第 2表示手段と、 撮像手段に対し、 映像を撮像させるとともに、 この映像を出力するよう 指令する指令手段と、 この指令手段からの指令に基づき、 撮像手段が映 像を撮像し、 この映像を出力するよう動作制御を行う撮影制御手段と、 この撮影制御手段が出力した映像情報を送信する送信手段と、 この送信 手段が送信した映像情報を受信する受信手段と、 この受信手段が受信し た映像情報を表示する第 3表示手段とを備えたので、 第 2表示手段の収 納状態に関わらず、 撮像手段で撮影した映像の内容を表示させることが でき、 装置の使用範囲が向上し、 装置の利便性が向上する。 Also, in the display device for a moving body according to the present invention, the imaging means and the second display means are integrally formed, and the integrally formed unit is provided on the ceiling portion behind the first display means in the moving body. Since the unit is mounted as a unit when it is mounted on the ceiling, the man-hour for mounting the device can be reduced, and costs can be reduced. In addition, a display device for a moving object according to the present invention includes: an imaging unit that captures an image; a first display unit that is provided near a driver's seat of the moving object and that displays a rear image of the moving object; A command that instructs the imaging means to capture an image and output the image, the second display means being provided behind the installation position of the first display means in the moving body and displaying a desired image; Means, imaging control means for performing operation control such that the imaging means captures an image based on an instruction from the instruction means, and outputs the image, and transmission means for transmitting the image information output by the imaging control means And receiving means for receiving the video information transmitted by the transmitting means, and third display means for displaying the video information received by the receiving means. It not, is possible to display the contents of the image captured by the imaging means The range of use of the device is improved, and the convenience of the device is improved.

また、 この発明に係る移動体用表示装置は、 撮像手段を 3 6 0 ° 回動 可能に形成するとともに、 指令に基づいて撮像手段の撮影方向を変更す る撮影方向変更手段を設け、 移動体の周辺映像及び移動体内の映像を撮 影可能にしたので、 装置の使用範囲がさらに向上し、 装置の利便性がさ らに向上する。  In addition, the display device for a moving body according to the present invention, wherein the imaging means is formed so as to be rotatable by 360 °, and a shooting direction changing means for changing a shooting direction of the imaging means based on a command is provided. This makes it possible to capture images of the surrounding area and images of the inside of a moving object, further improving the range of use of the device and further improving the convenience of the device.

また、 この発明に係る移動体用表示装置は、 移動体外に指令手段と受 信手段と第 3表示手段とを有した通信手段を設けたので、 移動体外でも 移動体の状態を常時監視でき、 盗難や悪戯防止を図ることができる。  In addition, the display device for a moving body according to the present invention is provided with communication means having command means, receiving means, and third display means outside the moving body, so that the state of the moving body can be constantly monitored outside the moving body, Theft and mischief can be prevented.

さらに、 この発明に係る移動体用表示装置は、 撮像手段と第 2表示手 段とを一体に形成し、 この一体形成したュニットを移動体内の第 1表示 手段より後方の天井部に設けたので、 天井部に取り付ける際、 ユニット として取り付けるので、 装置の取付工数を削減でき、 コスト削減が図れ る。 図面の簡単な説明  Further, in the display device for a moving body according to the present invention, the imaging means and the second display means are integrally formed, and the integrally formed unit is provided on the ceiling portion behind the first display means in the moving body. In addition, since the unit is mounted as a unit when it is mounted on the ceiling, the man-hour for mounting the device can be reduced, and costs can be reduced. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES

第 1図は、 実施の形態 2に係る移動体用機器配設装置及び移動体用情 報処理装置の概略構成を示す概略構成図である。  FIG. 1 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile device arrangement device and a mobile information processing device according to a second embodiment.

第 2図は、 第 1図の要部構成を示す要部構成図である。  FIG. 2 is a main part configuration diagram showing a main part configuration of FIG.

第 3図は、 第 2図の要部を示す要部説明図である。  FIG. 3 is an explanatory view of a main part showing a main part of FIG.

第 4図は、 第 1図の要部構成を示す要部構成図である。  FIG. 4 is a main part configuration diagram showing the main part configuration of FIG.

第 5図は、 第 4図の要部の後面を示す要部後面図である。  FIG. 5 is a rear view of a main part showing a rear surface of the main part of FIG.

第 6図は、 第 4図の要部の側面断面を示す要部側面断面図である。 第 7図は、 第 1図の要部構成を示す要部構成図である。  FIG. 6 is a side sectional view of a main part showing a side cross section of the main part of FIG. FIG. 7 is a main part configuration diagram showing a main part configuration of FIG.

第 8図は、 第 7図の要部の後面を示す要部後面図である。  FIG. 8 is a rear view of a main part showing a rear surface of the main part of FIG.

第 9図は、 第 7図の要部の側面断面を示す要部側面断面図である。 第 1 0図は、 第 7図の要部の後面断面を示す要部後面断面図である。 第 1 1図は、 実施の形態 2に係る移動体用機器配設装置の要部構成を 示すプロック図である。 FIG. 9 is a side sectional view of a main part showing a side cross section of the main part of FIG. FIG. 10 is a rear cross-sectional view of a main part showing a rear cross-section of the main part of FIG. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a main configuration of a mobile device installation device according to a second embodiment.

第 1 2図は、 第 1 1図の要部を示す要部説明図である。  FIG. 12 is an explanatory view of a principal part showing a principal part of FIG.

第 1 3図は、 実施の形態 2に係る移動体用機器配設装置及び移動体用 情報処理装置の動作の流れを示すフローチヤ一トである。  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the operation flow of the mobile device arrangement device and the mobile information processing device according to the second embodiment.

第 1 4図は、 第 1図の状態から要部を移動,した状態を示す要部状態遷 移図である。  FIG. 14 is a main state transition diagram showing a state where the main part has been moved from the state of FIG.

第 1 5図は、 第 1 4図の要部の状態を示す要部状態図である。  FIG. 15 is a main part state diagram showing a state of main parts in FIG.

第 1 6図は、 第 1図の状態から要部を移動した状態を示す要部状態遷 移図である。  FIG. 16 is a main state transition diagram showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state of FIG.

第 1 7図は、 第 1 6図の要部の状態を示す要部状態図である。  FIG. 17 is a main part state diagram showing a state of main parts in FIG.

第 1 8図は、 第 1図の状態から要部を移動した状態を示す要部状態遷 移図である。  FIG. 18 is a main state transition diagram showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state of FIG.

第 1 9図は、 実施の形態 2に係る移動体用情報処理装置の要部構成を 示すプロック図である。  FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing a main configuration of a mobile information processing apparatus according to Embodiment 2.

第 2 0図は、 第 1 9図に使用される可視情報の例を示す説明図である c 第 2 1図は、 実施の形態 2に係る移動体用情報処理装置の動作の流れ を示すフローチヤ一卜である。 FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of visible information used in FIG. 19 c FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a flow of operation of the mobile information processing apparatus according to Embodiment 2. It's a trick.

第 2 2図は、 実施の形態 1に係る移動体用表示装置及ぶ移動体用機器 配設装置の要部構成を示す要部構成図である。  FIG. 22 is a main part configuration diagram showing a main part configuration of the mobile object display device and the mobile object device installation device according to the first embodiment.

第 2 3図は、 第 2 2図の要部を示す説明図である。  FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a main part of FIG.

第 2 4図は、 第 2 2図の要部を示す説明図である。  FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing a main part of FIG.

第 2 5図は、 第 2 2図の要部を示す説明図である。  FIG. 25 is an explanatory diagram showing a main part of FIG.

第 2 6図は、 実施の形態 1に係る移動体用表示装置の要部構成を示す ブロック図である。 第 2 7図は、 実施の形態 1に係る移動体用表示装置の動作の流れを示 すフローチヤ一トである。 FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing a main configuration of the display device for a mobile object according to the first embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a flow of operation of the display device for a mobile object according to the first embodiment.

第 2 8 ®は、 第 2 2図の状態から要部を移動した状態を示す要部状態 遷移図である。  FIG. 288 is a state transition diagram showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state shown in FIG.

第 2 9図は、 第 2 2図の状態から要部を移動した状態を示す要部状態 遷移図である。  FIG. 29 is a main part state transition diagram showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state of FIG. 22.

第 3 0図は、 実施の形態 6に係る移動体用表示装置及び移動体用機器 配設装置の概略構成を示す概略構成図である。  FIG. 30 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a display device for a mobile object and a device installation device for the mobile object according to the sixth embodiment.

第 3 1図は、 実施の形態 6に係る移動体用表示装置の要部構成を示す ブロック図である。  FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing a main configuration of a display device for a moving object according to the sixth embodiment.

第 3 2図は、 実施の形態 6に係る移動体用表示装置の動作の流れを示 すフローチヤ一トである。  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a flow of operation of the display device for a mobile object according to the sixth embodiment.

第 3 3図は、 第 3 0図の要部を示す要部説明図である。  FIG. 33 is an explanatory view of a principal part showing a principal part of FIG. 30.

第 3 4図は、 第 3 3図の状態から要部を移動した状態を示す要部状態 遷移図である。  FIG. 34 is a main part state transition diagram showing a state where main parts have been moved from the state of FIG. 33.

第 3 5図は、 実施の形態 6に係る移動体用表示装置が出力した可視情 報を表示した例を示す説明図である。  FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of displaying the visible information output by the display device for a mobile object according to the sixth embodiment.

第 3 6図は、 実施の形態 6に係る移動体用表示装置が出力した可視情 報を表示した例を示す説明図である。  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the visible information output by the mobile object display device according to Embodiment 6 is displayed.

第 3 7図は、 実施の形態 7に係る移動体用表示装置の概略構成を示す 概略構成図である。  FIG. 37 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a display device for a moving object according to Embodiment 7.

第 3 8図は、 実施の形態 7に係る移動体用表示装置及び移動体用機器 配設装置の要部を示す説明図である。  FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a main part of a display device for a mobile object and a device installation device for the mobile object according to the seventh embodiment.

第 3 9図は、 第 3 8図の表示例を拡大した説明図である。  FIG. 39 is an enlarged explanatory view of the display example of FIG. 38.

第 4 0図は、 実施の形態 8に係る移動体用機器配設装置の概略構成を 示すブロック図である。 第 4 1図は、 第 4 0図の表示例を示した説明図である。 FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile device installation device according to Embodiment 8. FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of FIG. 40.

第 4 2図は、 実施の形態 8に係る移動体用機器配設装置の動作の流れ を示すフロ一チヤ一トである。  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a flow of the operation of the mobile device installation apparatus according to Embodiment 8.

第 4 3図は、 実施の形態 9に係る移動体用情報処理装置の概略構成を 示すブロック図である。  FIG. 43 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile object information processing apparatus according to Embodiment 9.

第 4 4図は、 第 4 3図の表示例を示した説明図である。  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of FIG. 43.

第 4 5図は、 実施の形態 9に係る移動体用情報処理装置の動作の流れ を示すフローチヤ一卜である。  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a flow of operation of the mobile information processing apparatus according to the ninth embodiment.

第 4 6図は、 従来の移動体内部の要部を示す要部詳細図である。 第 4 7図は、 従来の移動体内部の要部を示す要部詳細図である。 第 4 8図は、 従来の移動体内に設けられた要部の構成を示す構成図で ある。  FIG. 46 is a detailed view of a main part showing a main part inside a conventional moving body. FIG. 47 is a detailed view of a main part showing a main part inside a conventional moving body. FIG. 48 is a configuration diagram showing a configuration of a main part provided in a conventional moving body.

第 4 9図は、 従来の移動体内に設けられた要部を示す要部説明図であ る。  FIG. 49 is an explanatory view of main parts showing main parts provided in a conventional moving body.

第 5 0図は、 従来の要部の断面を示す要部断面図である。  FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view of a main part showing a cross section of a conventional main part.

第 5 1図は、 従来の移動体内に設けられた要部の分解構成を示す分解 構成図である。  FIG. 51 is an exploded configuration diagram showing an exploded configuration of a main part provided in a conventional moving body.

第 5 2図は、 従来の要部の断面を示す要部断面図である。  FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view of a main part showing a cross section of a conventional main part.

第 5 3図は、 従来の要部の表示例を示す説明図である。  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example of a conventional main part.

第 5 4図は、 従来の移動体内に設けられた要部を示す要部説明図であ る。  FIG. 54 is an explanatory view of a main part showing a main part provided in a conventional moving body.

第 5 5図は、 従来の移動体内に設けられた要部を示す要部説明図であ る。 発明を実施するための最良の形態  FIG. 55 is an explanatory view of a main part showing a main part provided in a conventional moving body. BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION

以下、 この発明をより詳細に説述するために、 この発明を実施するた めの最良の形態について、 添付の図面に従ってこれを説明する。 Hereinafter, in order to explain the present invention in more detail, The best mode for this will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings.

実施の形態 1 . Embodiment 1

第 2 2図は実施の形態 1に係る移動体用表示装置及び移動体用機器配 設装置の概略構成を示す概略構成図、 第 2 3図は第 2 2図の要部を示す 説明図、 第 2 4図は第 2 2図の要部を示す説明図、 第 2 5図は第 2 2図 の要部を示す説明図、 第 2 6図は実施の形態 1に係る移動体用表示装置 の要部構成を示すブロック図、 第 2 7図は実施の形態 1に係る移動体用 表示装置の動作の流れを示すフローチャートである。 FIG. 22 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a display device for a mobile object and a device arranging device for a mobile device according to Embodiment 1, FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram showing a main part of FIG. FIG. 24 is an explanatory view showing a main part of FIG. 22, FIG. 25 is an explanatory view showing a main part of FIG. 22, and FIG. 26 is a display device for a moving body according to the first embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an operation flow of the mobile display device according to the first embodiment.

また、 第 2 8図は第 2 2図の状態から要部を移動した状態を示す要部 状態遷移図、 第 2 9図は第 2 2図の状態から要部を移動した状態を示す 要部状態遷移図である。  FIG. 28 is a main part state transition diagram showing a state where the main part has been moved from the state shown in FIG. 22. FIG. 29 is a main part showing a state where the main part has been moved from the state shown in FIG. It is a state transition diagram.

第 2 2図は、 実施の形態 1の移動体用機器配設装置を用いた移動体用 表示装置の概略構成を示す概略構成図であり、 1 2 1は運転席、 1 2 2 は助手席、 1 3 1は運転席の後ろに位置する右側中間席、 1 3 2は助手 席の後ろに位置し、 右側中間席の左側に位置する左側中間席である。 また、 2 2 0 0は自動車室内の天井部であり、 この天井部 2 2 0 0に は、 第 1表示手段としてのルームミラー 2 2 1 0と、 お側に配置された 座席 1 2 1、 1 3 1と左側に配置された座席 1 2 2、 1 3 2との間に位 置する箇所で、 自動車の前後方向に設けられた案内手段としてのレール 部 2 2 2 0と、 このレール部 2 2 2 0によって案内され、 第 1図と同様 に A方向または B方向に移動可能で、 複数の音響機器や映像再生機器を 収納したセンターコンソールュニッ卜 2 2 3 0とが設けられている。 ルームミラー 2 2 1 0は、 運転席 1 2 1前方の天井面に設けられ、 自 動車の後方や車室内の状況を表示する機能を有しており、 外観は、 第 2 3図に示すとおりである。 このルームミラ一 2 2 1 0の後方視界は破線 で示している。 レール部 2 2 2 0は、 溝部が形成され、 この溝部の開口部は溝部より 長さが短く形成されており、 後述するセンターコンソールュニット 2 2 3 0をレール部 2 2 2 0に取り付けた際、 溝部の開口部の裏面にてセン ターコンソールュニット 2 2 3 0の車輪部を保持するため、 センターコ ンソールュニット 2 2 3 0が落下しないようになっている。 FIG. 22 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile display device using the mobile device arrangement device of the first embodiment, where 1 2 1 is a driver's seat, and 1 2 2 is a passenger seat. 131, a right middle seat located behind the driver's seat, and 132 a left middle seat located behind the passenger seat and to the left of the right middle seat. Also, reference numeral 220 denotes a ceiling in the interior of the car, and the ceiling 220 is provided with a room mirror 222 as a first display means, a seat 122 arranged on the side, A rail section 222 provided as a guide means provided in the front-rear direction of the vehicle at a position between the seat 131 and the seats 122, 132 disposed on the left side, and this rail section. Guided by 222, movable in the A or B direction as in Fig. 1, and equipped with a center console unit 230 that houses multiple audio equipment and video playback equipment . The rearview mirror 222 is provided on the ceiling in front of the driver's seat 121, and has a function to display the situation behind the vehicle and the interior of the vehicle. The exterior is as shown in Fig. 23. It is. The rear view of the room mirror 2 210 is indicated by a broken line. A groove is formed in the rail portion 220, and an opening of the groove portion is formed to be shorter than the groove portion. A center console unit 230 described later is attached to the rail portion 220. At this time, the center console unit 230 is prevented from dropping to hold the wheel portion of the center console unit 230 on the back surface of the opening of the groove.

また、 レ一ル部 2 2 2 0の溝部開口部の裏面には、 センタ一コンソ一 ルュニット 2 2 3 0の車輪部に形成された嚙合部と係止する係止部が 形成されており、 車輪部に内蔵されている駆動モータにより、 駆動モ一 タを回動動作して車輪部を回動動作させて A方向または B方向にセン ターコンソールュニット 2 2 3 0を移動するようになっている。  In addition, on the back surface of the groove opening of the rail portion 222, a locking portion for locking with a joint formed on the wheel portion of the center console unit 230 is formed. The center motor unit 2 230 is moved in the A direction or the B direction by rotating the drive motor by rotating the drive motor by the drive motor built in the wheel portion. ing.

このレール部 2 2 2 0とセンタ一コンソールュニッ ト 2 2 3 0 との 関係を示す断面図は背景技術で説明した第 5 0図と同様の機構となつ ている。  A cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the rail section 222 and the center console unit 230 has the same mechanism as that of FIG. 50 described in the background art.

次に、 センタ一コンソールュニット 2 2 3 0について説明する。 2 2 3 0はセンタ一コンソールュニットであり、 センターコンソール ュニッ卜の筐体部 2 2 4 0と、 この筐体部 2 2 4 0の一部に開口部が形 成され、 この開口部内に収納可能に設けられ、 使用時には筐体部 2 2 4 0の下面 2 2 4 1の下方に突出する第 2表示手段としての表示部 2 2 5 0と、 筐体部 2 2 4 0の後面 (第 2 2図では手前側) に設けられた操 作部 2 2 6 0と、 筐体部 2 2 4 0内に配設された音響装置や映像装置に C Dや M Dや D V D等の記憶媒体を挿入する揷入口 2 2 7 1と、 セン夕 一コンソールュニッ ト 2 2 3 0を A方向に移動させる際に操作する操 作部 2 2 7 1と、 センターコンソールュニット 2 2 3 0を B方向に移動 させる際に操作する操作部 2 2 7 2とで構成されている。  Next, the center-unit console 230 will be described. Reference numeral 2230 denotes a center console unit. An opening is formed in the housing 2240 of the center console unit and a part of the housing 2240. It is provided so as to be stowable, and when used, a display section 2250 as second display means protruding below the lower surface 2241 of the housing section 2240, and a rear surface of the housing section 2240 ( A storage unit such as a CD, MD, or DVD is stored in the operation unit 2260 provided on the near side in Fig. 22) and the audio and video devices provided in the housing 2240. Insert the inlet 2 2 7 1, the control unit 2 2 7 1 that operates when moving the console unit 2 2 3 0 in the A direction, and the center console unit 2 2 3 0 in the B direction. It consists of an operation section 2 2 7 2 that is operated when moving.

また、 2 2 8 0はセンターコンソールユニット 2 2 3 0の下面に設け られ、 自動車後方や周辺、 及び車室内の映像を撮影する撮像手段として のカメラであり、 自動車の前後方向や左右方向を撮影可能にするよう 3 6 0 ° 方向に回動可能に構成されている。 このカメラ 2 2 8 0は、通常、 自動車後方が撮影可能な位置で保持されている。 Reference numeral 2280 is provided on the lower surface of the center console unit 2230, and serves as an imaging means for capturing images of the rear and periphery of the automobile and the interior of the vehicle. The camera is configured to be rotatable in a 360 ° direction so as to enable photographing in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction of the vehicle. The camera 2280 is normally held at a position where the rear of the car can be photographed.

また、 筐体部 2 2 4 0の下面 2 2 4 1には複数の開口部 2 2 4 2が形 成されており、 これ.ら複数の開口部 2 2 4 2には I Cカードのようなメ モリカードがそれぞれ揷入できる揷入口となっており、 本実施の形態で は 5枚のメモリ力一ドが挿入可能となっている。  In addition, a plurality of openings 2 224 are formed in the lower surface 224 of the housing 224, and these openings 224 are similar to those of an IC card. Each of the memory cards has an entrance through which a memory card can be inserted. In the present embodiment, five memory cards can be inserted.

なお、 表示部 2 2 5 0を筐体部 2 2 4 0の下面 2 2 4 1から突出させ たり筐体部 2 2 4 0内に収納させたりする駆動機構は、 後述する実施の 形態 2で説明する第 4図〜第 6図に示す駆動機構と同様の構成物が筐 体部 2 2 4 0内に設けられている。  Note that a drive mechanism for projecting the display portion 222 from the lower surface 222 of the housing portion 222 or storing it in the housing portion 222 is described in a second embodiment described later. The same components as those of the drive mechanism shown in FIGS. 4 to 6 to be described are provided in the housing 222.

また、 表示部 2 2 5 0は筐体部 2 2 4 0がレール部 2 2 2 0のどこの 位置に位置しているかにより、 C方向に移動して筐体部 2 2 4 0の下面 から表示部 2 2 5 0が突出されたり、 D方向に移動して筐体部 2 2 4 0 の中に収納されるように構成されている。  In addition, the display unit 222 moves in the C direction from the lower surface of the housing 220, depending on where the housing 220 is located on the rail 220. The display section 222 is configured to protrude or move in the direction D to be housed in the housing section 240.

また、 センターコンソールュニット 2 2 3 0を使用していない際は、 第 2 8図に示すように自動車内の最前方まで移動されるようになって いる (センターコンソールユニット 2 2 3 0の初期位置) 。  When the center console unit 2 230 is not used, it is moved to the front in the car as shown in Fig. 28 (the center console unit 2 230 Position).

ここで、 後述する実施の形態 2で説明する第 1図との相違点としては、 センタ一コンソールュニット 2 2 3 0の上下の向きが逆になつている とともに、 操作部 2 2 6 0がセンターコンソールュニッ 卜 2 2 3 0の側 面前面部に設けられており、 筐体部 2 2 4 0内に収納可能には構成され ておらず、 また、 筐体部 2 2 4 0の下面 2 2 4 1に 3 6 0 ° 回動可能な カメラが設けられている。  Here, the difference from FIG. 1 described in the second embodiment described below is that the center-console unit 2 230 is upside down and the operation unit 2 260 It is provided on the front side of the center console unit 2 230 and is not configured to be housed in the housing 2 240. Also, the lower surface 2 of the housing 2 240 A camera capable of rotating 360 ° is provided at 241.

次に、 ルームミラ一 2 2 1 0の表示について第 2 3図〜第 2 5図を用 いて説明する。 ルームミラー 2 2 1 0の構成としては、 背景技術で説明 した第 5 1図、 第 5 2図で説明した構成と同様となっている。 Next, the display of the room mirror 2210 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. FIG. The configuration of the room mirror 2 210 is described in the background art. The configuration is the same as that described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52.

ルームミラー 2 2 1 0は通常、ミラー(鏡)面 2 2 1 2となっており、 このミラー面 2 2 1 2の全面にて後方映像が写し出されている。 この時, ルームミラ一 2 2 1 0内部に設けられた液晶部 (図示せず) が指令に基 づき、 導通状態になると、 第 2 4図に示すとおり、 ミラ一面 2 2 1 2の 一部に液晶部の表示部 2 2 1 3が表示され、 実際に、 カメラ 2 2 8 0に て撮影された後方映像を表示すると第 2 5図に示すとおりになる。  The room mirror 2 210 usually has a mirror (mirror) surface 2 2 12, and a rear image is projected on the entire surface of the mirror surface 2 2 12. At this time, as shown in Fig. 24, when the liquid crystal unit (not shown) provided inside the room mirror 2201 becomes conductive according to the command, a part of the mirror 2221 The display section 2 2 13 of the liquid crystal section is displayed, and the rear image actually shot by the camera 2280 is displayed as shown in FIG.

なお、 2 2 1 1はルームミラー 2 2 1 0を自動車 1 0 0の天井部 2 2 0 0に取り付けられる支持部である。 なお、 この支持部 2 2 1 1は、 天 井部 2 2 0 0に取り付けるのではなく、 フロントガラス 1 0 1の中央部 上方に取り付けるようにしてもよい。  Reference numeral 2 211 denotes a support for attaching the room mirror 220 to the ceiling 220 of the automobile 100. Note that this support portion 2 211 may be attached to the upper part of the windshield 101 instead of being attached to the ceiling portion 220.

次に、 第 2 6図、 第 2 7図を用いて本実施の形態 1の動作制御を行な う主要部の構成、 及び動作の流れについて説明する。  Next, the configuration of the main part that performs the operation control of the first embodiment and the flow of the operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27.

図において、 2 2 5 0は第 2表示手段としてのセンタ一コンソールュ ニット 2 2 3 0に突出/収納可能に形成された表示部、 2 6 0 1は表示 部 2 2 5 0が突出しているか否か、 即ち表示部 2 2 5 0の収納状態を実 施の形態 1で説明した第 1 1図に示す設定値選択手段が選択した表示 部設定値に基づき判断する収納状態判断手段、 2 2 6 2は収納状態判断 手段 2 2 6 1が判断した結果に基づき、 後述する撮像手段 2 2 8 0と第 1表示手段 2 2 1 0に動作指令を出力する表示制御手段であり、 この表 示制御手段 2 6 0 2は表示部 2 2 5 0が筐体部 2 2 4 0内に収納され ていると収納状態判断手段が判断した場合は、 撮像手段 2 2 8 0及び第 1表示手段 2 2 1 0に対して動作指令を出力せず、 表示部 2 2 5 0が筐 体部 2 2 4 0の下面 2 2 4 1から下方に突出していると判断した場合 は、 撮像手段 2 2 8 0及び第 1表示手段 2 2 1 0に対して動作指令を出 力するようになっている。 また、 表示制御手段 2 6 0 2が出力した動作指令に基づき、 撮影動作 を開始し、 撮影した映像を出力する撮像手段としての C C Dカメラ等の カメラ 2 2 8 0、 表示制御手段 2 6 0 2が出力した動作指令に基づき、 導通状態となってカメラ 2 2 8 0から出力される映像を表示するよう 動作する第 1表示手段としてのルームミラー 2 2 1 0であり、 このルー ムミラーは導通状態になった際、 第 2 3図に示す状態となり、 カメラ 2 2 8 0から映像が出力されると、 第 2 4図に示す状態のように、 この映 像を液晶部の表示部 2 2 1 3に表示する。 In the figure, reference numeral 2250 denotes a display unit formed so as to be able to protrude / retract from the center console unit 2230 as the second display means, and 2601 denotes whether or not the display unit 250 is protruding That is, the storage state determination means for determining the storage state of the display section 250 based on the display section set value selected by the set value selection section shown in FIG. 11 described in the first embodiment. Reference numeral 2 denotes a display control unit that outputs an operation command to an image pickup unit 2280 and a first display unit 2210 based on a result determined by the storage state determination unit 2261. Means 2602 is the imaging means 2280 and the first display means 22 when the storage state determining means determines that the display section 250 is housed in the housing section 240. If no operation command is output to 10 and the display unit 2250 is judged to protrude downward from the lower surface 2241 of the housing 2240, Is adapted to output the operation command to the 2 2 8 0 and a first display means 2 2 1 0. Also, based on the operation command output by the display control means 2602, a photographing operation is started, and a camera 280 such as a CCD camera as an imaging means for outputting a captured image, and a display control means 2602 Is a room mirror 2210 as the first display means that operates to display an image output from the camera 2280 based on the operation command output by the camera, and the room mirror is in a conductive state. 23, the state shown in FIG. 23 is reached, and when an image is output from the camera 228, this image is displayed on the liquid crystal display section 221, as shown in the state shown in FIG. Display in 3.

なお、 本実施の形態 1ではセンターコンソールュニッ 卜 2 2 3 0に設 けた表示部 2 2 5 0の収納状態により、 カメラ 2 2 8 0の動作、 及びこ の撮像手段 2 2 8 0が撮影した映像を表示部 2 2 4 0が表示するよう にしていたが、 以下のとおりにしても良く、 第 2 7図にはこれら構成要 素も含めている。  In the first embodiment, the operation of the camera 2280 and the imaging means 2280 take a picture depending on the storage state of the display section 2250 provided in the center console unit 2230. Although the display unit 222 displays the obtained video, the following may be performed, and FIG. 27 includes these components.

即ち、 運転席 1 2 1の近傍に操作手段 2 6 0 3を設け、 この操作手段 2 6 0 3が操作された場合は、 センタ一コンソールュニット 2 2 3 0に 設けられた表示部 2 2 5 0が突出されている収納されているかに関わ らず、 カメラ 2 2 8 0及びルームミラー 2 2 1 0に対して動作指令を出 力し、 カメラ 2 2 8 0で撮影された映像をルームミラ一 2 2 1 0に設け られた液晶部の表示部に表示ずるようにしている。 このため、 センタ一 コンソ一ルュニッ ト 2 2 3 0の表示部 2 2 5 0が筐体部 2 2 4 0内に 収納されている際に、 運転者がカメラ 2 2 8 0で撮影された映像をル一 ムミラーに表示して見たい場合等に有用である。  That is, an operating means 2603 is provided near the driver's seat 121, and when this operating means 2603 is operated, the display unit 2 2 provided on the center console unit 2230 is provided. Regardless of whether 50 is protruded or stored, an operation command is output to the camera 2280 and the room mirror 2210, and the video taken by the camera 2280 is output to the room mirror. The display is made on the display section of the liquid crystal section provided in the 222. For this reason, when the display unit 2250 of the center console unit 2230 is stored in the housing 2240, the image taken by the driver with the camera 2280 This is useful when you want to display on a room mirror.

また、 カメラ 2 2 8 0は 3 6 0 ° 回動動作可能に構成しており、 使用 者の好みに応じてカメラ 2 2 8 0の向きを調節できるようになつてい る。 即ち、 運転席 1 2 1の近傍にカメラ 2 2 8 0の撮影方向の調節を行 なう撮影方向変更手段 2 6 0 4が設けられており、 カメラ 2 2 8 0の通 常の向きは真後方向であるが、 例えば、 運転者が好きな方向を見たい際 に、 簡単に操作することのみで、 カメラ 2 2 8 0の向きが変更できる。 カメラの撮影方向の変更は、 撮影方向変更手段 2 6 0 4への押圧操作 が継続して行なわれている間、 カメラ 2 2 8 0を回動動作制御するよう にしたり、 撮影方向変更手段 2 6 0 4への 1回の操作につき 2 ° ずつ時 計方向に回転するようにしても良い。 In addition, the camera 228 is configured to be able to rotate 360 °, so that the direction of the camera 228 can be adjusted according to the user's preference. That is, a photographing direction changing means 2604 for adjusting the photographing direction of the camera 2280 is provided in the vicinity of the driver's seat 1221, and the communication direction of the camera 2280 is provided. The normal direction is the rearward direction. For example, when the driver wants to see the desired direction, the direction of the camera 228 can be changed by simply operating the driver. The camera's shooting direction can be changed by controlling the rotation of the camera 2280 while the pressing operation on the shooting direction changing means 2604 is continuously performed, or by changing the shooting direction changing means 2 The rotation in the clockwise direction by 2 ° per one operation on the 604 may be performed.

次に、 第 1 8図を用いて本実施の形態 1の動作の流れについて説明す る。 第 1 8図は、 本実施の形態 1の動作の流れを示すフローチャートで ある。  Next, the operation flow of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a flow of the operation of the first embodiment.

まず、 自動車の電源が投入されると装置の動作が開始され(ステップ 2 7 0 0 )、 まず収納状態判断手段 2 6 0 1がセンターコンソールュニ ット 2 2 3 0の筐体部 2 2 4 0内に表示部 2 2 5 0が収納されている か否かを判断し (ステップ 2 7 0 1 ) 、 このステップ 2 7 0 1で表示部 2 2 5 0が筐体部 2 2 4 0の下面 2 2 4 1から下方に突出していると 収納状態判断手段 2 6 0 1が判断した場合、 表示制御手段 2 6 0 2が力 メラ 2 2 8 0と、 ル一ムミラー 2 2 1 0内に設けた液晶部の表示部 2 2 1 3とに対し、 導通させてカメラ 2 2 8 0と表示部 2 2 1 3を動作させ (ステップ 2 7 0 2 ) 、 このステップ 2 7 0 2を受けてカメラ 2 2 8 0 が向いている方向の映像を撮影し (ステップ 2 7 0 3 ) 、 このステップ 2 7 0 3にて撮影された映像を液晶の表示部 2 2 1 3にて表示する (ス テツプ 2 7 0 4 ) 。  First, when the power of the automobile is turned on, the operation of the device is started (step 2700), and first, the storage state judging means 2601 is connected to the housing 2 of the center console unit 2230. It is determined whether or not the display unit 2250 is stored in 40 (step 2701), and in this step 2701, the display unit 2250 is replaced with the housing unit 2240. When the storage state determining means 260 determines that the display protrudes downward from the lower surface 2240 of the camera, the display control means 2602 controls the force of the camera 2280 and the interior of the room mirror 2210. The camera 2 280 and the display 2 2 13 are operated by turning on the display 2 2 13 of the liquid crystal unit provided in (Step 2 7 0 2), and this Step 2 7 0 2 is received. To capture an image in the direction to which the camera 2280 faces. (Step 2703), and display the image captured in Step 2703 on the liquid crystal display 2221 ( Step 274).

このステップ 2 7 0 4の処理後、 ステップ 2 7 0 1に戻り、 以下、 上 記と同様の処理を繰り返す。  After the processing in step 274, the process returns to step 2701, and the same processing as described above is repeated.

また、 ステップ 2 7 0 1で収納状態判断手段 2 6 0 1がセンターコン ソールュニット 2 2 3 0の筐体部 2 2 4 0内に表示部 2 2 5 0が突出 されていない、 即ち、 収納されていると判断した場合は、 表示制御手段 2 6 0 2がカメラ 2 2 8 0及びル一ムミラー 2 2 1 0の液晶部に対し て非導通を継続し、 ルームミラー 2 2 1 0はミラー面 2 2 1 1の全面が ミラーの機能とする (ステップ 2 7 0 5 ) 。 このステップ 2 7 0 5の処 理後、 再度ステップ 2 7 0 1に戻り、 処理を繰り返す。 Also, in step 2701, the storage state determination means 2601 does not protrude the display section 250 into the housing section 240 of the center console unit 230, that is, it is stored. Display control means 2602 continues to be non-conductive to the liquid crystal section of the camera 2280 and the room mirror 2210, and the room mirror 2210 has the mirror function of the entire mirror surface 2221. Yes (Step 275). After the processing of step 275, the flow returns to step 2701 again, and the processing is repeated.

ここで、 センタ一コンソールュニット 2 2 3 0の移動動作について は、 後述する実施の形態 2と同様の動作、 即ち、 1ポジションごとに移 動させた場合は、 以下のとおりとなる。  Here, the movement operation of the center-unit console unit 230 is the same as that of the second embodiment described later, that is, as follows when the movement is performed for each position.

センターコンソールュニッ卜 2 2 3 0を使用していない際には、 セン 夕一コンソールュニット 2 2 3 0は第 2 8図に示すように、 天井部 2 2 0 0の中央前方でレール部 2 2 2 0の溝部内に支持されており、 表示部 は筐体部 2 2 3 0内に収納されている (第 1ポジション) 。  When the center console unit 2 230 is not used, the center console unit 2 230 is mounted on the rail section at the center front of the ceiling 2 200 as shown in Fig. 28. The display unit is supported in the 2202 groove, and the display unit is housed in the housing 230 (first position).

この第 1ポジションの際、 操作部 2 2 7 2への押圧操作が 1回、 即ち A方向への 1ポジション分の移動を指令する操作があると、 第 1ポジシ ョンから運転席、 助手席の前席対応である第 2 9図に示す位置まで移動 する (第 2ポジション) 。 また、 上記と同様に操作部 2 2 7 2への押圧 操作が 1回あると、 第 2ポジションから 1ポジション分、 A方向に移動 して中間席の左右席 1 3 1、 1 3 2対応である第 2 2図に示す位置まで 移動する (第 3ポジション) 。 さらに、 1ポジション分の移動を指令す る操作があると、 第 3ポジションから 1ポジション分、 A方向に移動し て図示しない後席対応である位置まで移動する (第 4ポジション) 。 逆に、 B方向へ移動する際は、 上述した順序の逆、 即ち、 第 4ポジシ ヨンから第 2 2図 (第 3ポジション) 、 第 2 9図 (第 2ポジション) を 経て第 2 8図 (第 1ポジション) に示すように移動する。  In this first position, if there is one pressing operation to the operation unit 2 2 7 2, that is, an operation to command movement of one position in the A direction, from the first position to the driver's seat and the passenger's seat Move to the position shown in Fig. 29 corresponding to the front seat (2nd position). In the same manner as above, if there is one pressing operation on the operation unit 2 272, it moves in the A direction by one position from the second position, and it is compatible with the left and right middle seats 13 1 and 13 2 Move to the position shown in Fig. 22 (3rd position). Furthermore, if there is an operation to instruct movement of one position, the robot moves in the direction A from the third position by one position and moves to a position corresponding to a rear seat (not shown) (fourth position). On the other hand, when moving in the direction B, the order described above is reversed, that is, from the fourth position to the second position shown in FIGS. 22 (third position) and FIG. 29 (second position). Move as shown in (1st position).

この実施の形態 1では、 上記したセンタ一コンソールュニッ卜 2 2 3 0の設置ポジションとして 4個所としたが、 後述する実施の形態 2のよ うに 5個所のポジションとしてもよい。 また、 センタ一コンソールュニット 2 2. 3 0は、 移動体の電源を 0 F Fした際、 どの位置に設定されていても第 1ポジションとしての第 2 8 図に示す初期位置に自動的に設定され移動するようになっている。 なお、 自動車の床部と天井部のそれぞれにレール部 2 2 2 0を設けて おき、 使用用途によって、 センターコンソールュニット 2 2 3 0をどち らかのレール部 2 2 2 0に付け替えることが可能なように構成しても 良い。 In the first embodiment, the center-to-console unit 230 is set at four positions, but may be set at five positions as in a second embodiment described later. In addition, the center console unit 2.2.30 automatically sets the initial position shown in Fig. 28 as the first position, regardless of the position, when the power of the moving object is turned off. It is supposed to move. In addition, a rail section 222 is provided on each of the floor and ceiling of the car, and the center console unit 230 is replaced with either rail section 220 according to the intended use. It may be configured so that

従って、 上記したように本実施の形態 1では、 レール部 2 2 2 0とセ ンターコンソールボックス 2 2 3 0とを自動車室内の天井部に設ける よう構成したため、 自動車の床部 (フロア部) を使用できないような移 動体、 即ち、 フロア部が搭乗者の通路となっているような移動体である 例えばバスや電車、 飛行機等においても、 上記した装置を利用できる環 境を提供でき、 装置の使用範囲が向上し、 移動体内の限られたスペース を有効的に活用することができるという効果が得られる。 , また、 上記したようにセンターコンソールュニット 2 2 3 0に主に後 方映像を撮影する撮像手段としてのカメラを設け、 センターコンソール ユニット 2 2 3 0の表示部 2 2 5 0が下方に突出している際、 ル一ムミ ラー 2 2 1 0を用いて後方を見た場合、 ルームミラ一 2 2 1 0の後方視 界である第 2 2図に示す破線部の一部が表示部 2 2 5 0に遮られてい るため、 後方視界が悪くなるが、 この状態の際には、 ルームミラ一 2 2 1 0の一部に設けた液晶部の表示部にカメラで撮影した後方映像をリ ームミラー 2 2 1 0の液晶表示部に表示することにより、 自動車の後方 視界を遮ることがあった場合でも、 運転者は常時、 良好な後方視界を得 ることができ、 装置の利便性が向上する。  Therefore, as described above, in the first embodiment, since the rails 222 and the center console box 222 are provided on the ceiling in the vehicle interior, the floor (floor) of the vehicle is provided. It is a moving object that cannot be used, that is, a moving object whose floor is a passage for passengers.For example, a bus, a train, an airplane, or the like can provide an environment in which the above-described device can be used. The range of use is improved, and the limited space in the moving body can be effectively used. Also, as described above, the center console unit 2 230 is provided with a camera as an imaging means for mainly capturing a rear image, and the display unit 2 250 of the center console unit 2 230 projects downward. When looking at the rear using the room mirror 2110 during viewing, the part of the broken line shown in Fig. 22 which is the rear view of the room mirror 2210 is displayed on the display 2225. However, the rear view is poor because the camera is blocked by the camera, but in this case, the rear image captured by the camera is displayed on the display of the liquid crystal unit provided in a part of the room mirror. By displaying the information on the liquid crystal display section 210, even if the rear view of the vehicle is obstructed, the driver can always obtain a good rear view and the convenience of the device is improved.

なお、 上記した実施の形態 1は、 自動車の床部が使用できない場合と 限定して説明したが、 自動車の床部を使用できるものにおいても、 本装 置を使用しても良いことは言うまでもない。 実施の形態 2 . Although the first embodiment described above is limited to the case where the floor of the car cannot be used, the present invention is also applicable to the case where the floor of the car can be used. It goes without saying that a device can be used. Embodiment 2

次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 2に係る移動体用機器配設装置及び移 動体用情報処理装置について説明する。  Next, a mobile device installation device and a mobile information processing device according to another embodiment 2 of the present invention will be described.

上記した実施の形態 1では、 レール部 1 1 0とセンターコンソールュ ニット 2 0 0とは、 自動車内の天井部 (ルーフ部) に設けるように説明 したが、 これらレール部 1 1 0とセンタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0と を自動車内の床部 (フロア部) に設けても良い。  In the first embodiment described above, the rail section 110 and the center console unit 200 are described as being provided on the ceiling (roof section) in the automobile. The console unit 200 and may be provided on the floor (floor) in the automobile.

第 1図は実施の形態 2に係る移動体用機器配設装置及び移動体用情 報処理装置の概略構成を示す概略構成図、 第 2図は第 1図の要部構成を 示す要部構成図、 第 3図は第 2図の要部を示す要部説明図である。  FIG. 1 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile device installation device and a mobile information processing device according to Embodiment 2, and FIG. 2 is a main configuration showing a main portion configuration of FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory view of a main part showing the main part of FIG.

これら第 1図〜第 3図において、 1 0 0は移動体としての自動車であ り、 この実施の形態 1では、 6人乗車可能なミニバンタイ.プの自動車と して説明している。 1 0 1は自動車 1 0 0のフロントガラス、 1 0 2は 自動車 1 0 0の車室前方に設けられた樹脂等で形成されたィンストウ ルメントパネル、 1 0 3はインストウルメントパネル 1 0 2の運転席側 (後述する) に設けられたスピードメ一夕ゃ夕コメータ等のメータ類が 配置されるコンビネ一ションメータパネル、 1 0 4はハンドルである。  In FIGS. 1 to 3, reference numeral 100 denotes a vehicle as a moving body, and in the first embodiment, the vehicle is described as a minivan-type vehicle that can accommodate six people. 101 is a windshield of the automobile 100, 102 is an instrument panel formed of resin or the like provided in front of the cabin of the automobile 100, and 103 is an instrument panel of the automobile 102. A combination meter panel on the driver's seat side (to be described later) is provided with meters such as a speedometer and a cometer, and 104 is a steering wheel.

また、 1 0 5はインストウルメントパネル 1 0 2の上面部であるダッ シュポ一ド、 1 0 6はィンストウルメントパネル 1 0 2の略中央部に設 けられた表示装置、 1 0 7は横一列でそれぞれが等間隔で設けられた操 作部であり、 この操作部 1 0 7には、 本実施の形態 2では、 緊急時に押 圧操作することにより外部の連絡センターに自動接続され緊急状況下 であることを通報するエマージェンシーコールシステムを作動させる 操作部や、 非常停止を車外に伝達するハザ一ドランプの点灯/消灯の操 作を行なう操作部や、 外部の電子手帳 (P D A ) のデ一夕を取り込ませ る操作部等が設けられている。 In addition, reference numeral 105 denotes a dash pad on the upper surface of the instrument panel 102, reference numeral 106 denotes a display device provided at a substantially central portion of the instrument panel 102, reference numeral 107 Are operation units provided at equal intervals in a horizontal line.In the second embodiment, the operation unit 107 is automatically connected to an external communication center by performing a pressing operation in an emergency. Activate the emergency call system that reports an emergency situation and turn on / off the hazard lamp that transmits an emergency stop to the outside of the vehicle. There is an operation section for performing operations, and an operation section for taking in the data from an external electronic notebook (PDA).

また、 1 0 8は撮像手段としてのカメラ、 1 0 9は後述するセンター コンソールュニット 2 0 0が最前部まで移動された際、 内部に収納され る収納スペース、 1 1 0はセンターコンソールユニット 2 0 0を自動車 1 0 0の前後方向、 即ち、 第 1図の A方向または B方向に移動可能に案 内する案内手段としてのレール部である。  Reference numeral 108 denotes a camera as an imaging means, 109 denotes a storage space to be stored inside when a center console unit 200 described later is moved to the forefront, 110 denotes a center console unit 2 Reference numeral 00 denotes a rail portion as a guide means that is movable in the front-rear direction of the automobile 100, that is, in the direction A or B in FIG.

このレール部 1 1 0は、第 3図に示すように、内部に溝部が形成され、 自動車室内の床部に配設されており、 溝部の底部には、 レール部 1 1 0 の長手方向と垂直方向に等間隔のスリット状に形成されており、 これが 嚙合部 1 1 1となっている。  As shown in FIG. 3, the rail portion 110 has a groove formed therein and is disposed on the floor in the vehicle interior. The bottom of the groove has the same length as the rail 110 in the longitudinal direction. It is formed in the shape of a slit at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and this is the joint portion 111.

また、 1 2 0は前席であり、 この前席 1 2 0は運転席 1 2 1と助手席 1 2 2とで構成されている。 1 3 0は中間席であり、 この中間席 1 3 0 も前席 1 2 0と同様に運転席側 1 2 1、 即ち、 第 1図上では右側の席 1 3 1と、 助手席側 1 2 2、 即ち、 第 1図上では左側の席 1 3 2とで構成 されており、 さらに、 図示していないが、 中間席 1 3 0の後ろ側には、 後席が設けられており、 前席 1 2 0や中間席 1 3 0と同様に 2席から構 成されている。  Further, 120 is a front seat, and the front seat 120 is composed of a driver seat 121 and a passenger seat 122. 130 is the middle seat, and the middle seat 130 is also the driver's seat side 1 21 like the front seat 120, that is, the right seat 13 1 in Fig. 1 and the passenger seat side 1 2, that is, the left seat 13 in FIG. 1, and furthermore, although not shown, a rear seat is provided behind the middle seat 130, It consists of two seats like the front seats 120 and the middle seats 130.

また、インストウルメントパネル 1 0 2内部には、図示していないが、 自動車に搭載されている全ての機器の制御を統括している中央制御手 段と、 ディスプレイ等の表示手段を制御する表示制御手段と、 音声出力 を行なうスピーカの音量を制御する音量制御手段と、 自動車 1 0 0に搭 載されたエンジンの動作を制御するエンジン制御手段と、 自動車 1 0 0 に搭載されたエアコンディショナー (エアコン) の動作制御を行なうェ アコン制御手段等が設けられており、 これら表示制御手段、 音量制御手 段、 エンジン制御手段、 エアコン制御手段は、 中央制御手段の動作指令 に基づいて制御されるように構成され、 中央制御手段はセンタ一コンソ ールュニッ ト 2 0 0に配設された音響機器や映像機器等に対しても所 定の動作制御が行われるようになつているため、 自動車内の搭乗者が操 作手段 2 3 0を操作することにより、 センターコンソールュニット 2 0 0内に設けられた C Dプレーヤやカセッ トテーププレーヤ、 D V Dプレ 一ャ等を動作させて、 可聴情報は、 中央制御手段の指令に基づき、 スピ 一力への音量の制御が行なわれてスピ一力から音声が出力されるよう になっている。 Although not shown, the instrument panel 102 has a central control means for controlling all the devices mounted on the vehicle, and a display for controlling display means such as a display. Control means, volume control means for controlling the volume of a speaker for outputting sound, engine control means for controlling the operation of an engine mounted on the vehicle 100, and an air conditioner mounted on the vehicle 100 ( Air conditioner control means for controlling the operation of the air conditioner are provided. These display control means, volume control means, engine control means, and air conditioner control means are operated by the central control means. The central control means performs predetermined operation control on audio equipment, video equipment, and the like provided in the center console 200. Therefore, the passenger in the car operates the operating means 230 to operate the CD player, cassette tape player, DVD player, etc. provided in the center console unit 200. According to the audible information, the volume of the sound is controlled based on the command of the central control means, and the sound is output from the sound.

なお、 操作手段 1 0 7を操作した際も上記と同様に可聴情報は、 中央 制御手段の指令に基づき、 スピ一力への音量の制御が行なわれてスピ一 力から音声が出力されるようになっている。  Also, when the operating means 107 is operated, the audible information is controlled in such a manner that the volume of the audible information is controlled based on the command of the central control means and the sound is output from the loudspeaker. It has become.

また、 操作手段 2 3 0の操作に基づき、 可視情報も、 中央制御手段の 指令に基づき、 表示手段 2 2 0への表示制御を行い、 表示手段 2 2 0に 可視情報が表示されるようになっている。 なお、 操作手段 1 0 7を操作 した際も可聴情報と同様に中央制御手段の指令に基づき、 スピーカへの 音量の制御が行なわれてスピー力から音声が出力されるようになって いる。  Also, based on the operation of the operation means 230, the visible information is also controlled to be displayed on the display means 220 based on the command of the central control means, so that the visible information is displayed on the display means 220. Has become. When the operating means 107 is operated, the volume of the loudspeaker is controlled based on a command from the central control means in the same manner as the audible information, and sound is output from the speed.

次に、 第 2図、 第 3図を用いてセンターコンソールュニット 2 0 0に ついて説明する。  Next, the center console unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS.

第 2図はセンターコンソールュニット 2 0 0の全体構成を示す全体 構成図、 第 3図は第 2図に示すセンタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0とレ FIG. 2 is an overall configuration diagram showing the overall configuration of the center console unit 200, and FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the center console unit 200 shown in FIG.

—ル部 1 1 0との関係を示す関係図である。 FIG. 4 is a relationship diagram showing a relationship with a rule section 110;

2 0 0はセンターコンソールュニットであり、 センタ一コンソールュ ニッ卜の筐体部 2 1 0と、 この筐体部 2 1 0の一部に開口部 2 1 2が形 成され、 この開口部 2 1 2内に収納可能に設けられ、 使用時には筐体部 Reference numeral 200 denotes a center console unit, and a housing 210 of the center console unit and an opening 212 formed in a part of the housing 210 are formed. It is provided so that it can be stored inside 1 and 2

2 1 0の上面 2 1 1の上方に突出する第 2表示手段としてのディスプ レイ 2 2 0と、 筐体部 2 1 0の一部に開口部 2 1 3が形成され、 この開 口部 2 1 3内に収納可能に設けられ、 使用時には筐体部 2 1 0の上面 2 1 1の上方に突出する操作部 2 3 0と、 コンソールュニット 2 0 0を A 方向に移動させる際に操作する操作部 2 4 1と、 コンソールュニット 2 0 0を B方向に移動させる際に操作する操作部 2 4 2と、 音響装置や映 像装置に C Dや M Dや D V D等の記憶媒体を挿入する揷入口 2 4 3と、 筐体部 2 1 0の前面部に取り付けられた撮像手段としてのカメラ 2 5 0とで構成されている。 また、 筐体部 2 1 0の上面 2 1 1には複数の開 口部 2 1 4が形成されており、 これら複数の開口部には I Cカードのよ うなメモリカードがそれぞれ揷入できる揷入口となっており、 本実施の 形態では 5枚のメモリカードが揷入可能となっている。 A display as a second display means protruding above the upper surface 2 11 of 2 10 An opening 213 is formed in the ray 220 and a part of the housing 210, and is provided so as to be housed in the opening 213. When used, an upper surface of the housing 210 is used. An operation unit 2 30 protruding upward from 2 1 1, an operation unit 2 41 operated when the console unit 200 is moved in the A direction, and a console unit 200 moved in the B direction Operating unit 2 42, a storage medium such as a CD, MD, DVD, etc. to be inserted into an audio or video device, and an entrance 2 43, which is attached to the front of the housing 210. It is composed of a camera 250 as an imaging means. In addition, a plurality of openings 216 are formed in the upper surface 211 of the housing 210, and the openings through which a memory card such as an IC card can be inserted. In this embodiment, five memory cards can be inserted.

ここで、 第 4図〜第 1 0図を用いて表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0につ いて説明する。  Here, the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 10.

第 4図はセンタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0の要部である表示部 2 2 0の後面斜視図、 第 5図は表示部 2 2 0の背面を示す背面図、 第 6図 は表示部 2 2 0の側断面を示す側断面図である。  FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the display unit 220 which is a main part of the center console unit 200, FIG. 5 is a rear view showing the back of the display unit 220, and FIG. FIG. 2 is a side sectional view showing a side section of 20.

また、 第 7図はセン夕一コンソールュニッ卜 2 0 0の要部である操作 部 2 3 0の外観を示す要部外観図、 第 8図は第 7図に示す操作部 2 3 0 の裏面の概略構成を示す裏面概略構成図、 第 9図は操作部 2 3 0の側面 断面を示す側面断面図、 第 1 0図は操作部 2 3 0の正面断面を示す正面 断面図である。  FIG. 7 is an external view of a main part showing an external appearance of an operation part 230 which is a main part of the console unit 200, and FIG. 8 is a rear view of the operation part 230 shown in FIG. 9 is a side cross-sectional view showing a side cross-section of the operation unit 230, and FIG. 10 is a front cross-sectional view showing a front cross-section of the operation unit 230.

表示部 2 2 0の支持部 2 2 2の下方には表示部 2 2 0の駆動機構が 設けられており、 この駆動機構は、 一面に嚙合部 2 2 3 aを形成した櫛 状部 2 2 3と、 この櫛状部 2 2 3に形成された嚙合部 2 2 3 aと嚙合す るように、 筐体部 2 1 0内に設けられ、 一部に嚙合部 2 2 4 aが形成さ れた駆動部 2 2 4とで構成されている。 この駆動部 2 2 4の嚙合部 2 2 4 aと櫛状部 2 2 3の嚙合部 2 2 3 aとが嚙合し、 駆動部 2 2 4の E方向または F方向への回動駆動により 櫛状部 2 2 3も H方向または G方向への上下移動が行われる。 また、 筐 体部 2 1 0の内部は断層状の中空形状になっており、 一端が筐体部 2 1 0の上面 2 1 1に固定され、 他端が筐体部 2 1 0の 1層目の上面 2 1 6 に固定され表示部 2 2 0を支持する棒状支持部 2 2 5 , 2 2 6を設けて いる。 なお、 これら棒状支持部 2 2 5、 2 2 6は表示部 2 2 0の支持部A drive mechanism for the display section 220 is provided below the support section 222 of the display section 220. The drive mechanism includes a comb-like section 22 having a joint section 230 on one surface. 3 is provided in the housing portion 210 so as to mate with the joint portion 2 23 a formed on the comb-like portion 2 23, and the joint portion 224 a is formed partially. Drive unit 2 24. The joining portion 2 24 a of the driving portion 2 24 and the joining portion 2 2 3 a of the comb portion 2 2 3 are joined together, and the driving portion 2 The shape part 2 23 also moves up and down in the H direction or the G direction. Also, the inside of the housing part 210 has a hollow shape like a fault, one end of which is fixed to the upper surface 211 of the housing part 210, and the other end is a single layer of the housing part 210. Bar-shaped support portions 225 and 226 fixed to the upper surface 216 of the eye and supporting the display portion 220 are provided. Note that these rod-shaped support portions 2 25 and 2 26 are support portions of the display portion 220.

2 2 2に形成された孔 2 2 2 a , 2 2 2 bのそれぞれに嵌入されており , 表示部 2 2 0がぐらつくことを防止するものとなっている。 Each of the holes 222 formed in 222 is fitted in each of the holes 222 a and 222 b to prevent the display portion 220 from wobbling.

第 7図に示すように、 表示部 2 2 0の表示面側は櫛状部 2 2 3より左 側、 即ち、 自動車内の後方側に配置されている。  As shown in FIG. 7, the display surface side of the display section 220 is disposed on the left side of the comb section 23, that is, on the rear side in the automobile.

操作部 2 3 0の操作面 2 3 1には、 自動車に設けられているエアコン (図示せず) の動作制御の操作を行なうエアコン操作部 2 3 2と、 所定 の操作を行なう際に表示部 2 2 0の表示面 2 2 2に表示されたメニュ —画面から所望の内容を選択して実行させる操作を行なう突起部が中 央に形成されたジョイスティック 2 3 3と、 センターコンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0内に収納された音響機器や映像再生装置 (図示せず) の動作制 御の操作を行なう A V機器操作部 2 3 4と、 0〜 9までの 1 0キ一と送 信キ一と終了キ一を設け、 自動車内に設置されたハンズフリ一電話 (図 示せず) やナビゲーシヨン装置の番号入力、 また計算を行なったりする 際に操作する操作部 2 3 5である。 なお、 操作面 2 3 1には、 傾斜が付 けられている。  An operation surface 2 31 of the operation unit 230 is provided with an air conditioner operation unit 2 32 for operating operation of an air conditioner (not shown) provided in the automobile, and a display unit for performing a predetermined operation. 2 2 0 display surface 2 2 2 menu displayed 2 — joystick 2 3 3 with a projection formed in the center to select and execute desired contents from the screen, and center console unit 2 A / V equipment operation section for controlling the operation of the audio equipment and video playback device (not shown) housed in 0 0, 2 3 4 and 10 keys 0 to 9 and the transmission key An operation unit 235 provided with an end key, which is used to input a number of a hands-free phone (not shown) or a navigation device installed in a car or to perform calculations. Note that the operation surface 231 is inclined.

また、 第 8図に示すように操作部 2 3 0の裏面 2 3 6には、 操作部 2 In addition, as shown in FIG.

3 0の駆動機構が構成されており、 この駆動機構は、 弧状に形成され一 面に嚙合部 2 3 7 aが形成された櫛状部 2 3 7と、 筐体部 2 1 0内に設 けられ、 一部に嚙合部 2 3 8 aが形成された駆動部 2 3 8とで構成され ている。 また、 一部には内部に回動軸 (図示せず) が嵌入され、 操作部 2 3 0が筐体部 2 1 0から突出したり筐体部 2 1 0内に収納したりす る際の支点となる軸受部 2 3 9 a、 2 3 9 bが形成されており、 この軸 受部 2 3 9 a、 2 3 9 bの対面には、 操作部 2 3 0が筐体部 2 1 0から 外れないよう筐体部 2 1 0の内部に形成された係止部 2 1 1 aに係止 する係止部 2 3 9 c、 2 3 9 dが形成されている。 A drive mechanism 30 is configured. The drive mechanism includes a comb-shaped part 237 formed in an arc shape and having a joint part 237a formed on one side, and a housing part 210. And a drive part 238 partially formed with a joint part 238a. ing. In addition, a rotation shaft (not shown) is fitted into a part, and a fulcrum when the operation part 230 projects from the housing part 210 or is stored in the housing part 210. The bearings 239a and 239b are formed, and on the opposite side of the bearings 239a and 239b, the operation unit 230 is attached to the housing unit 210. Locking portions 239c and 239d are formed to lock with locking portions 211a formed inside the housing portion 210 so as not to come off.

このように構成しているため、 操作部 2 3 0は駆動部 2 3 8の嚙合部 2 3 8 aと櫛状部 2 3 7の嚙合部 2 3 7 aとが嚙合し、 駆動部 2 3 8の I方向または J方向への回動駆動により櫛状部 2 2 3も J方向または I方向への弧を描くような移動が行われる。  Due to such a configuration, the operation part 230 is formed by combining the joint part 238a of the drive part 238 with the joint part 237a of the comb-like part 237. The comb-shaped portion 223 is also moved by drawing an arc in the J direction or the I direction by the rotation drive of the 8 in the I direction or the J direction.

また、 ディスプレイ 2 2 0は筐体部 2 1 0がレール部 1 1 0のどこの 位置に位置しているかにより、 H方向に移動して筐体部 2 1 0の上面 2 1 1からディスプレイ 2 2 0の表示面 2 2 1が突出されたり、 G方向に 移動して筐体部 2 1 0の中に収納されるように構成されており、 また、 操作部 2 3 0も筐体部 2 1 0がレール部 1 1 0のどこの位置に位置し ているかにより、 I方向に移動して筐体部 2 1 0の上面 2 1 1から操作 部 2 3 0の操作面 2 3 1が突出されたり、 J方向に移動して筐体部 2 1 0の中に収納されるよう構成されている。  Also, the display 220 moves in the H direction depending on the position of the housing section 210 on the rail section 110 and moves from the top surface 211 of the housing section 210 to the display 2. The display surface 2 21 of 20 is configured to protrude or move in the G direction to be housed in the housing 210, and the operation unit 230 is also provided in the housing 2. Depending on where 110 is located on rail 110, it moves in the I direction and the operation surface 23 of operation unit 230 protrudes from the upper surface 211 of housing 210. Or is moved in the J direction and housed in the housing 210.

ここで、 レール部 1 1 0とセンターコンソールュニッ卜 2 0 0との関 係について説明すると、 筐体部 2 1 0の下面 2 1 5にはレール部 1 1 0 内部の溝部に形成された係止部 1 1 1と嚙合するよう周面部に嚙合部 2 0 2が形成された回動動作可能な車輪部 2 0 1が設けられ、 車輪部 2 0 1には駆動部 (図示せず) が内蔵されており、 この駆動部が回動動作 することにより車輪部 2 0 1が回動動作する。  Here, the relationship between the rail section 110 and the center console unit 200 will be described. The lower surface 2 15 of the housing section 210 is formed in a groove inside the rail section 110. A rotatable wheel portion 201 having a coupling portion 202 formed on a peripheral surface portion to be engaged with the locking portion 111 is provided, and a driving portion (not shown) is provided on the wheel portion 201. Is built in, and the wheel unit 201 rotates by the rotation of the driving unit.

ここで、 車輪部 2 0 1は周面部に形成された嚙合部 2 0 2とレール部 1 1 0に形成された係止部 1 1 1とが嚙合しているため、 駆動部が回転 すると、 センタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0が A方向または B方向に移 動することとなる。 即ち、 第 2図に示すように、 操作部からの指令に基 づき、 車輪部 2 0 1が G方向に回転動作すると、 センターコンソールュ ニット 2 0 0が A方向に移動し、 逆に、 車輪部 2 0 1が H方向に回転動 作すると、 センターコンソールユニット 2 0 0が B方向に移動動作する c 一方、 駆動部の回動動作がない場合は、 車輪部 2 0 1はレール部 1 1 0と嚙合しているため、 A方向にも B方向にも移動しないこととなり、 駆動部の停止位置でセンターコンソールュニッ 卜 2 0 0が位置決めさ れるようになっている。Here, since the wheel portion 201 has a coupling portion 202 formed on the peripheral surface portion and a locking portion 111 formed on the rail portion 110, the driving portion rotates. Then, the center console unit 200 moves in the A direction or the B direction. That is, as shown in FIG. 2, when the wheel unit 201 rotates in the G direction based on a command from the operation unit, the center console unit 200 moves in the A direction, and conversely, the wheel unit When the unit 201 rotates in the H direction, the center console unit 200 moves in the B direction c. On the other hand, when there is no rotation of the drive unit, the wheel unit 201 becomes the rail unit 1 1 Since it is coincident with 0, it does not move in either the A direction or the B direction, and the center console unit 200 is positioned at the stop position of the drive unit.

1 、 センターコンソールユニット 2 0 0を使用していない際は、 第 図に示すように、 センターコンソールュニット 2 0 0が空間スペース 1 1 0内に収容されている (センターコンソールュニット 2 0 0の初期位 次に、 セン夕一コンソールュニット 2 0 0の動作について、 詳細に説 明する。  1, when the center console unit 200 is not used, the center console unit 200 is housed in the space 110 as shown in FIG. Next, the operation of the console unit 200 will be described in detail.

第 1 1図は実施の形態 2に係る移動体用機器配設装置の動作制御を 行う主要部分の構成を示すプロック図、 第 1 2図は第 1 1.図の要部の説 明を行なう要部説明図、 第 1 3図は実施の形態 2に係る移動体用機器配 設装置の動作の流れを示すフローチャートであり、 まず、 センターコン ソールュニット 2 0 0の動作制御を行う要部構成について説明する。  Fig. 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the main part that controls the operation of the mobile device installation device according to Embodiment 2, and Fig. 12 explains the main parts of Fig. 11. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an operation flow of the mobile device installation apparatus according to the second embodiment. First, a main configuration for controlling the operation of the center console unit 200 will be described. explain.

2 4 1、 2 4 2は操作部であり、 第 1図に示す A方向にセンターコン ソールュニット 2 0 0を移動させる際は、 操作部 2 4 1を押圧操作し、 B方向に移動させる際は操作部 2 4 2を押圧操作を行うことによって、 所定の指令信号が出力される。 ここで、 本発明の実施の形態 2では操作 部 2 4 1、 2 4 2を所定時間以内 (例えば、 2秒以内) に連続的に押圧 操作した際は、 その押圧操作の回数をカウントして後述する設定値選択 手段 1 1 0 1が、 センターコンソールュニット 2 0 0の設定位置が決定 するようになつている。 Reference numerals 241, 242 denote operation units.When the center console unit 200 is moved in the direction A shown in FIG. 1, the operation unit 241 is pressed and when the center console unit 200 is moved in the B direction. By performing a pressing operation on the operation unit 242, a predetermined command signal is output. Here, in the second embodiment of the present invention, when the operation units 241, 242 are continuously pressed within a predetermined time (for example, within 2 seconds), the number of times of the pressing operation is counted. Setting value selection described later The means 111 is adapted to determine the set position of the center console unit 200.

この設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1は、 操作部 2 4 1 , 2 4 2が出力した指 令信号に基づき、 記憶手段 1 1 0 2 (後述する) に記憶された移動設定 値から所定の設定値を選択し、 この設定値を出力するものである。 1 1 0 2は自動車室内に設けられた各座席 1 2 0、 1 3 0の位置それぞれに- 車輪部 2 0 1が移動する方向及び距離と、 センターコンソールュニット 2 0 0に設けられた表示部 2 2 0をセンターコンソ一ルュニット 2 0 0の上面から突出させるか否かの設定値と、 センターコンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0に設けられた操作部 2 3 0をセン夕一コンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0の上面から突出させるか否かの設定値とを対応させて記憶した記 憶手段であり、 第 1 2図に示すように記憶されている。  The set value selection means 1101 sets a predetermined setting from the movement set value stored in the storage means 110 (described later) based on the command signal output from the operation units 241 and 242. Select a value and output this set value. 1102 is located at each of the seats 120, 130 provided in the vehicle interior-the direction and distance that the wheel unit 201 moves, and the display provided on the center console unit 200. The setting value of whether or not the unit 220 protrudes from the upper surface of the center console unit 200, and the operation unit 230 provided on the center console unit 200 are connected to the central console unit 200. This is storage means for storing a set value of whether or not to protrude from the upper surface of 0 in association with each other, and is stored as shown in FIG.

この第 1 2図に記憶されている内容を説明すると、 センタ一コンソ一 ルュニット 2 0 0には固定箇所として 5つのポジションがぁり、 第 1ポ ジシヨンは初期位置であり、 センタ一コンソールユニット 2 0 0が収納 スペース 1 0 9内に収納されており、 レール部 1 1 0の最前部に位置し ている。 このため、 センタ一コンソールユニット 2 0 0の移動設定値は 第 1ポジションを 0 c mとし、 表示部 2 2 0は筐体部 2 1 0内に収納さ れ、 操作部 2 3 0も筐体部 2 1 0内に収納されている。 この第 1ポジシ ヨンはどの座席位置にも対応していない。  Explaining the contents stored in FIG. 12, the center console unit 200 has five fixed positions, the first position is the initial position, and the center console unit 2 00 is stored in the storage space 109 and is located at the forefront of the rail 110. Therefore, the movement setting value of the center-to-console unit 200 is 0 cm at the first position, the display unit 220 is housed in the housing unit 210, and the operation unit 230 is also in the housing unit. It is stored in 210. This first position does not correspond to any seating position.

第 2ポジションは運転席対応のポジションであり、 第 1ポジションを 基準に第 1図に示す A方向に 5 c m移動する移動設定値が設定されて おり、 表示部 2 2 0は筐体部 2 1 0内に収納され、 操作部 2 3 0は筐体 部 2 1 0の上面から所定の傾斜角度 Θを有するよう突出されるように なっている。  The second position is a position corresponding to the driver's seat, and a movement setting value for moving by 5 cm in the direction A shown in Fig. 1 based on the first position is set, and the display unit 220 is the housing unit 21. The operating unit 230 is housed in the housing 0, and protrudes from the upper surface of the housing unit 210 so as to have a predetermined inclination angle Θ.

また、 第 3ポジションは助手席対応のポジションであり、 第 1ポジシ ョンを基準に第 1図に示す A方向に 1 5 c m移動する移動設定値が設 定されており、 表示部 2 2 0は筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出されるよう になっており、 操作部 2 3 0も筐体部 2 1 0の上面から所定の傾斜を有 するよう突出される。 The third position is for the passenger seat, and the first position The movement set value is set to move 15 cm in the direction A shown in Fig. 1 based on the position of the display unit, and the display unit 220 projects from the upper surface of the housing unit 210. The operation section 230 also projects from the upper surface of the housing section 210 so as to have a predetermined inclination.

また、 第 4ポジションは中間席対応のポジションであり、 第 1ポジシ ヨンを基準に第 1図に示す A方向に 6 0 c m移動する移動設定値が設 定されており、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0は、 筐体部 2 1 0の上面か ら突出されるようになつている。 この際、 中間席の左右どちらの席にも、 この第 4ポジションが対応している。  The fourth position is a position corresponding to the middle seat, and a movement set value for moving 60 cm in the direction A shown in FIG. 1 based on the first position is set. The operation section 230 is configured to protrude from the upper surface of the housing section 210. In this case, the fourth position corresponds to both the left and right middle seats.

さらに、 図示はしていないが、 第 5ポジションは後席対応であり、 第 1ポジションを基準に第 1図に示す A方向に 1 2 0 c m移動する移動 設定値が設定されており、 第 4ポジションと同様に表示部 2 2 0と操作 部 2 3 0は、 筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出されるようになつている。 こ の際、後席の左右どちらの席にも、 この第 4ポジションが対応している。 これら第 1ポジション〜第 5ポジションは、 センターコンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0に設けられた操作手段 2 4 1、 2 4 2の所定時間内に連続する 操作回数により決められるものであり、 例えば、 センターコンソールュ ニット 2 0 0が第 1ポジションに設定されている際、 操作手段 2 4 1に 対し、 連続した押圧操作が 3回あった場合、 第 2ポジション、 第 3ポジ シヨンを経て、 第 4ポジションに設定される。 逆に、 センタ一コンソ一 ルュニット 2 0 0がこの状態、 即ち、 第 4ポジションの際、 操作手段 2 4 2に対し、 連続した押圧操作が 2回あった場合、 第 3ポジションを経 て第 2ポジションに設定されるようになっている。  Further, although not shown, the fifth position is for rear seats, and a movement set value for moving 120 cm in the direction A shown in FIG. 1 based on the first position is set. Similarly to the position, the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are configured to protrude from the upper surface of the housing unit 210. In this case, the fourth position corresponds to both the left and right rear seats. These first to fifth positions are determined by the number of consecutive operations within a predetermined time of the operation means 241 and 242 provided in the center console unit 200. When the console unit 200 is set to the first position, if there are three consecutive pressing operations on the operating means 241, the second position, the third position, and the fourth position Is set to Conversely, if the center console unit 200 is in this state, that is, in the fourth position, if the operating means 242 has been pressed twice consecutively, it will pass through the third position to the second position. It is set to the position.

ここで、 1ポジションごとに移動させた場合は、以下のとおりとなる。 即ち、 センタ一コンソ一ルユニット 2 0 0を使用していない際には、 セ ン夕ーコンソールュニット 2 0 0は第 1 4図に示すように、 インストウ ルメントパネルの中央下部に収納されており (第 1ポジション) 、 セン ターコンソールュニッ卜 2 0 0の表示部 2 2 0、 操作部 2 3 0の動作状 態は第 1 5図に示すとおりである。 Here, when it is moved for each position, it is as follows. That is, when the center console unit 200 is not used, the console unit 200 is installed as shown in FIG. It is housed in the center lower part of the instrument panel (first position), and the operation state of the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 of the center console unit 200 is as shown in Fig. 15. is there.

この際、 操作部 2 4 1への押圧操作が 1回、 即ち A方向への 1ポジシ ヨン分の移動を指令する操作があると、 車輪部 2 0 1が回転して第 1ポ ジションから運転席対応である第 1 6図に示す位置まで移動する (第 2 ポジション) 。 この際のセンタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0の表示部 2 2 0、 操作部 2 3 0の動作状態は第 1 7図に示すとおりである。  At this time, if there is one pressing operation on the operation unit 241, that is, an operation to command movement of one position in the A direction, the wheel unit 201 rotates and the operation starts from the first position. Move to the position shown in Fig. 16 corresponding to the seat (second position). At this time, the operation states of the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 of the center console unit 200 are as shown in FIG.

また、 上記と同様に操作部 2 4 1への押圧操作が 1回あると、 上記と 同様に第 2ポジションから 1ポジション分、 A方向に移動して助手席対 応である第 1図に示す位置まで移動する (第 3ポジション) 。 この際の センターコンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0の動作状態は第 2図に示すとおり である。  Similarly, if there is a single pressing operation on the operation unit 241 as in the above, it moves in the A direction by one position from the second position in the same manner as above, and is shown in FIG. Move to the position (3rd position). The operating state of the center console unit 200 at this time is as shown in FIG.

さらに、 上記と同様に 1ポジション分の移動を指令する操作があると、 第 3ポジションから 1ポジション分、 A方向に移動して中間席対応であ る第 1 8図に示す位置まで移動する (第 4ポジション) 。 この際のセン タ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0の動作状態も第 2図に示すとおりであ る。  Furthermore, if there is an operation to command the movement of one position in the same manner as above, the robot moves in the A direction from the third position by one position and moves to the position shown in Fig. 18 corresponding to the middle seat ( 4th position). The operating state of the center console unit 200 at this time is also as shown in FIG.

また、 第 1 8図に示す位置から、 さらに 1ポジション分の移動を指令 する操作があると、 図示しないが第 4ポジションから A方向に移動して 後席対応の位置まで移動する (第 5ポジション) 。 この際のセンターコ ンソールュニッ卜 2 0 0の動作状態も第 2図に示すとおりである。  Also, if there is an operation to command the movement of one more position from the position shown in Fig. 18, it moves from the fourth position in the direction A (not shown) to the position corresponding to the rear seat (not shown). ). The operation state of the center console unit 200 at this time is also as shown in FIG.

逆に、 B方向へ移動する際は、 上述した順序の逆、 即ち、 第 5ポジシ ヨンから第 1 8図 (第 4ポジション) 、 第 1図 (第 3ポジション) 、 第 1 6図 (第 2ポジション) を経て第 1 4図 (第 1ポジション) に示すよ うに移動する。 なお、 センターコンソールユニット 2 0 0は、 移動体の電源を O F F した際、 どの位置に設定されていても第 1ポジションとしての第 1 4図 に示す初期位置に自動的に設定され移動するようになっている。 Conversely, when moving in the direction B, the order described above is reversed, that is, from the fifth position to the positions shown in FIGS. 18 (4th position), 1 (3rd position), and 16 (2nd position). Position) and move as shown in Fig. 14 (1st position). Note that the center console unit 200 is automatically set to the initial position shown in Fig. 14 as the first position and moves when the power of the moving object is turned off, regardless of the position. Has become.

また、 第 1 1図に示す 1 1 0 3は、 設定値選択手段から出力された第 5図に示す記憶手段 1 1 0 2から選択した移動設定値、 表示手段突出設 定値としての表示部設定値及び操作手段突出設定値としての操作部設 定値に基づき、 センターコンソールュニット 2 0 0を移動設定値に応じ た移動を行い、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から 突出させるか筐体部 2 1 0内に収納させる移動制御手段であり、 1 1 0 4は移動制御手段 1 1 0 3が出力した制御信号に基づき、 センターコン ソールュニット 2 0 0を第 1図に示す A方向または B方向に移動させ、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0とを筐体部 2 1 0の上面に突出させたり 筐体部 2 1 0内に収納させる移動手段であり、' この移動手段 1 1 0 4は 車輪部 2 0 1、 この車輪部 2 0 1の外周面に形成された嚙合部 2 0 2、 車輪部 2 0 1に内蔵され駆動部 (図示せず) 、 レール部 1 1 0、 このレ —ル部 1 1 0の溝内に形成された係止部 1 1 1、 並びに、 表示部 2 2 0 の駆動機構及び操作部 2 3 0の駆動機構とで構成されている。  Also, 1103 shown in FIG. 11 is a movement set value selected from the storage means 1102 shown in FIG. 5 outputted from the set value selection means, and a display section setting as a display means protrusion set value. The center console unit 200 is moved according to the movement set value based on the operation unit setting value as the operation value and the operation means protrusion setting value, and the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are moved to the housing unit 2. Movement control means that protrudes from the upper surface of the housing 10 or is housed in the housing 210, and 1104 is a center console unit 200 based on a control signal output from the movement control means 1103. Is moved in the direction A or B shown in FIG. 1 so that the display section 220 and the operation section 230 are protruded from the upper surface of the housing section 210 or are housed in the housing section 210. This moving means 1 1 0 4 is a wheel section 201, a coupling section 202 formed on the outer peripheral surface of the wheel section 201, A drive unit (not shown) built into the wheel unit 201, a rail unit 110, a locking unit 111 formed in the groove of the rail unit 110, and a display unit 22 0 drive mechanism and the drive mechanism of the operation unit 230.

次に、 本実施の形態 2の移動体用機器配設装置の動作を示すフローチ ヤートを第 1 3図に示し、 この第 1 3図を用いて本装置の動作について 説明する。  Next, FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the operation of the mobile device installation device according to the second embodiment, and the operation of this device will be described with reference to FIG.

まず、 移動体の電源が投入されると操作待受状態となり (ステップ 1 3 0 0 ) 動作が開始される。 このステップ 1 3 0 0の際、 設定値選択手 段 1 1 0 1が第 1図に示す A方向への操作、 即ち、 セン夕一コンソール ユニット 2 0 0の操作部 2 4 1を押圧操作されたか否かを判断し (ステ ップ 1 3 0 1 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 0 1で操作部 2 4 1の操作があつた と判断した場合は、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が操作部 2 4 1の押圧操作 が所定時間内 (例えば 2秒以内) に何回あつたかを判断し (ステップ 1 3 0 2 ) 、 筐体内に設けられ、 現在、 センタ一コンソールユニット 2 0 0の設定されているポジションを常時更新記憶しておく記憶部 (図示せ ず) の記憶内容を設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が抽出する (ステップ 1 3 0 3 ) 。 First, when the power of the mobile body is turned on, the operation standby state is set (step 1300), and the operation starts. At the time of this step 1300, the setting value selection means 1 101 is operated in the direction A shown in FIG. 1, that is, the operation section 2 41 of the console unit 200 is pressed. It is determined whether or not the operation of the operation unit 241 has been performed in step 1301, and if the operation of the operation unit 241 has been performed in this step 131 2 4 1 pressing operation Is determined within the predetermined time (for example, within 2 seconds) (step 1302), and the position set in the center-to-console unit 200, which is provided in the housing, is constantly updated. The stored value of the storage unit (not shown) to be stored is extracted by the set value selecting means 111 (step 1303).

次に、 ステップ 1 3 0 2の内容に基づき、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が 1ポジションの移動か否かを判断し (ステップ 1 3 0 4 ) 、 このステツ プ 1 3 0 4で 1ポジションの移動と判断された場合は、 ステップ 1 3 0 3の内容に基づき、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が、 現在のポジションに 1 ポジションを加算したポジションに対応するセンターコンソールュニ ット 2 0 0の移動方向及び移動距離と、 表示部 2 2 0を筐体部 2 1 0の 上面から突出させるか否かの表示部設定値とを、 操作部 2 3 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの操作部設定値とを選択して移動 制御手段 1 1 0 3に出力し (ステップ 1 3 0 5 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 0 5の処理後、 移動制御手段 1 1 0 3が設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1からの出 力を受けて、 所定の移動動作を行うよう移動手段 1 1 0 4に対して動作 制御信号を出力してセンターコンソールュニット 2 0 0を移動させる とともに、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0を突出させる設定値であれば突 出させ、 筐体部 2 1 0内に収納させる設定値であれば筐体部 2 1 0内に 収納する (ステップ 1 3 0 6 ) 。 このステップ 1 3 0 6の動作後、 ステ ップ 1 3 0 1に戻り、 操作部 2 4 1、 4 2の操作待受状態となり、 ス テツプ 1 3 0 1以降の動作処理は上記説明と同様になる。  Next, based on the contents of step 1302, it is determined whether or not the set value selecting means 1101 moves by one position (step 1304), and in this step 1304 one position is determined. If it is determined that the position has been moved, the set value selecting means 1101, based on the contents of step 133, sets the center console unit 200 corresponding to the position obtained by adding one position to the current position. The moving direction and the moving distance of 0, and the setting value of the display unit for determining whether or not the display unit 220 is projected from the upper surface of the housing unit 210, and the operation unit 230 to the housing unit 210 The operation unit setting value of whether or not to protrude from the upper surface is selected and output to the movement control means 1103 (step 1305). After the processing of this step 1305, the movement control means 1 1 0 3 receives the output from the set value selecting means 1 1 0 1 and operates the moving means 1 1 0 4 to perform the specified moving operation A control signal is output to move the center console unit 200, and the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are protruded if they are set to protrude and stored in the housing unit 210. If the set value is to be set, it is stored in the housing 210 (step 1306). After the operation of step 1306, the operation returns to step 1301, and the operation units 241, 42 become ready for operation. The operation processing after step 1301 is the same as described above. become.

また、 ステップ 1 3 0 4で 1ポジションの移動と判断されなかった場 合は、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が 2ポジションの移動か否かを判断し (ステップ 1 3 0 7 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 0 7で 2ポジションの移動と 判断された場合は、 ステップ 1 3 0 3の内容に基づき、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が、 現在のポジションに 2ポジションを加算したポジションに 対応するセンターコンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0の移動方向及び移動距離 と、 表示部 2 2 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの表示部 設定値と、 操作部 2 3 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの 操作部設定値とを選択して移動制御手段 1 1 0 3に出力し (ステップ 1 3 0 8 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 0 8の処理後、 移動制御手段 1 1 0 3が設 定値選択手段 1 1 0 1からの出力を受けて、 所定の移動動作を行うよう 移動手段 1 1 0 4に対して動作制御信号を出力してセンタ一コンソ一 ルュニット 2 0 0を移動させるとともに、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0 を突出させる (ステップ 1 3 0 9 ) 。 このステップ 1 3 0 9の動作後、 ステップ 1 3 0 1に戻り、操作部 2 4 1 , 2 4 2の操作待受状態となり、 ステップ 1 3 0 1以降の動作処理は上記説明と同様になる。 If it is not determined in step 13304 that the movement is one position, it is determined whether or not the setting value selecting means 1101 is a movement of two positions (step 1307). If it is determined in step 13 07 that the movement is two positions, the setting value selection 1 101 is the direction and distance of movement of the center console unit 200 corresponding to the position obtained by adding 2 positions to the current position, and the display section 220 is viewed from the top of the housing section 210. A display unit setting value indicating whether or not to protrude and an operation unit setting value indicating whether or not the operation unit 230 is to be protruded from the upper surface of the housing unit 210 are selected and provided to the movement control unit 1103. Output (Step 13 08), and after the processing of Step 13 08, the movement control means 110 3 receives the output from the set value selection means 110 1 so as to perform a predetermined movement operation. An operation control signal is output to the moving means 110 to move the center console unit 200 and the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are protruded (step 1309). . After the operation of step 1309, the process returns to step 1301, and the operation units 241, 242 become ready for operation, and the operation processing after step 1301 is the same as described above. .

また、 ステップ 1 3 0 7で 2ポジションの移動と判断されなかった場 合は、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が 3ポジションの移動か否かを判断し (ステツプ 1 3 1 0 ) 、 このステツプ 1 3 1 0で 3ポジションの移動と 判断された場合は、 ステップ 1 3 0 3の内容に基づき、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が、 現在のポジションに 3ポジションを加算したポジションに 対応するセンターコンソールュニット 2 0 0の移動方向及び移動距離 と、 表示部 2 2 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの表示部 設定値と、 操作部 2 3 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの 操作部設定値とを選択して移動制御手段 1 1 0 3に出力し (ステップ 1 3 1 1 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 1 1の処理後、 移動制御手段 1 1 0 3が設 定値選択手段 1 1 0 1からの出力を受けて、 所定の移動動作を行うよう 移動手段 1 1 0 4に対して動作制御信号を出力してセンターコンソ一 ルュニット 2 0 0を移動させるとともに、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0 を突出させる (ステップ 1 3 1 2 ) 。 このステップ 1 3 1 2の動作後、 ステップ 1 3 0 1に戻り、操作部 2 4 1 , 2 4 2の操作待受状態となり、 ステップ 1 3 0 1以降の動作処理は上記説明と同様になる。 If it is not determined in step 1307 that the movement is for two positions, it is determined whether the set value selection means 111 is a movement for three positions (step 1310), and this step is performed. If it is determined that the movement is 3 positions in 1 3 0, the setting value selection means 1 1 0 1 is set to the center corresponding to the position obtained by adding 3 positions to the current position, based on the contents of step 13 0 3 The moving direction and moving distance of the console unit 200, the display unit setting value indicating whether or not the display unit 220 projects from the upper surface of the housing unit 210, and the operation unit 230 by the housing unit Select the operation section setting value for whether or not to protrude from the upper surface of 210 and output it to the movement control means 1103 (step 1311). After the processing of step 1311, move The control means 1103 receives the output from the set value selection means 110101 and performs a predetermined moving operation. Moves the center console one Ruyunitto 2 0 0 outputs an operation control signal to the mobile unit 1 1 0 4, to protrude the operation unit 2 3 0 and the display unit 2 2 0 (Step 1 3 1 2). After this step 1 3 1 2 Returning to step 1301, the operation sections 241, 242 are in an operation standby state, and the operation processing after step 1301, is the same as described above.

また、 ステップ 1 3 0 3で 3ポジションの移動と判断されなかった場 合は、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が 4ポジションの移動と判断し、 ステツ プ 1 3 0 3の内容に基づき、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が、 現在のポジシ ヨンに 4ポジションを加算したポジションに対応するセンターコンソ ールュニッ ト 2 0 0の移動方向及び移動距離と、 表示部 2 2 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの表示部設定値と、 操作部 2 3 0を 筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの操作部設定値とを選択し て移動制御手段 1 1 0 3に出力し (ステップ 1 3 1 3 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 1 3の処理後、 移動制御手段 1 1 0 3が設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1か らの出力を受けて、 所定の移動動作を行うよう移動手段 1 1 0 4に対し て動作制御信号を出力してセンタ一コンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0を移動 させるとともに、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0を突出させる (ステップ 1 3 1 4 )。このステップ 1 3 1 4の動作後、ステップ 1 3 0 1に戻り、 操作部 2 4 1、 2 4 2の操作待受状態となり、 ステップ 1 3 0 1以降の 動作処理は上記説明と同様になる。  If it is not determined in step 13 03 that the movement is 3 positions, the setting value selection means 1 101 determines that the movement is 4 positions, and the setting is made based on the contents of step 13 03. The value selection means 1101 moves the center console unit 200 corresponding to the position obtained by adding 4 positions to the current position, the moving direction and the moving distance, and the display unit 220 serves as the housing unit 210. Display unit setting value to determine whether to protrude from the upper surface of the housing and operation unit setting value to determine whether to protrude the operating unit 230 from the upper surface of the housing unit 210, and perform movement control means 1 1 0 3 (Step 1 3 1 3), and after the processing of Step 1 3 13, the movement control means 1 103 receives the output from the set value selection means 1 101 and performs the predetermined movement. An operation control signal is output to the moving means 110 to perform the operation, and the center console 200 Causes the movement, to protrude the operation unit 2 3 0 and the display unit 2 2 0 (Step 1 3 1 4). After the operation of step 1 3 14, the process returns to step 1 3 0 1, and the operation units 2 4 1 and 2 4 2 are in the operation standby state, and the operation processing after step 13 0 1 is the same as described above .

一方、 ステップ 1 3 0 1で設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が第 1図に示す B 方向への操作、 即ち、 センターコンソールユニッ ト 2 0 0の操作部 2 4 2を押圧操作されたか否かを判断し (ステップ 1 3 1 5 ) 、 このステツ プ 1 3 1 5で操作部 2 4 2の操作があつたと判断した場合は、 設定値選 択手段 1 1 0 1が操作部 2 4 2の押圧操作が所定時間内 (例えば 2秒以 内) に何回あつたかを判断し (ステップ 1 3 1 6 )、筐体内に設けられ、 現在、 センターコンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0の設定されているポジション を常時更新記憶しておく記憶部 (設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1の内部に設け られており、 この記憶部と比較参照して移動設定値等を決定する) の記 憶内容を設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が抽出する (ステップ 1 3 1 7 ) 。 次に、 ステップ 1 3 1 7の内容に基づき、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が 1ポジションの移動か否かを判断し (ステップ 1 3 1 8 ) 、 このステツ プ 1 3 1 8で 1ポジションの移動と判断された場合は、 ステップ 1 3 1 7の内容に基づき、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が、 現在のポジションに 1 ポジションを引算したポジションに対応するセンターコンソールュニ ット 2 0 0の移動方向及び移動距離と、 表示部 2 2 0を筐体部 2 1 0の 上面から突出させるか否かの表示部設定値と、 操作部 2 3 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの操作部設定値とを選択して移動制 御手段 1 1 0 3に出力し (ステップ 1 3 1 9 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 1 9 の処理後、 移動制御手段 1 1 0 3が設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1からの出力 を受けて、 所定の移動動作を行うよう移動手段 1 1 0 4に対して動作制 御信号を出力してセンタ一コンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0を移動させると ともに、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0を突出させる設定値であれば突出 させ、 筐体部 2 1 0内に収納させる設定値であれば筐体部 2 1 0内に収 納する (ステップ 1 3 2 0 ) 。 このステップ 1 3 2 0の動作後、 ステツ プ 1 3 0 1に戻り、 操作部 2 4 1 , 2 4 2の操作待受状態となり、 ステ ップ 1 3 0 1以降の動作処理は上記説明と同様になる。 On the other hand, in step 1301, the set value selecting means 1101 operates in the direction B shown in Fig. 1, that is, whether the operation section 242 of the center console unit 200 is pressed. (Steps 1315), and if it is determined in this step 1315 that the operation of the operation section 242 has been performed, the setting value selection means 1101 It is determined how many times the pressing operation has been performed within a predetermined time (for example, within 2 seconds) (step 1316), and it is installed in the housing and the center console unit 200 is currently set. Description of a storage unit that constantly updates and stores the position (provided inside the set value selection unit 1101, and determines the movement set value etc. by comparing with this storage unit and referring to this storage unit). The contents are extracted by the set value selecting means 1101 (step 1317). Next, based on the contents of step 1317, it is determined whether or not the setting value selecting means 1101 moves by one position (step 1318), and in this step 1318, one position is determined. If it is determined that the position has been moved, the setting value selecting means 1101 sets the center console unit 2 corresponding to the position obtained by subtracting one position from the current position based on the contents of step 1317. The moving direction and the moving distance of 0, the setting value of the display unit whether or not the display unit 220 projects from the upper surface of the housing unit 210, and the operation unit 230 of the housing unit 210 The operation unit setting value for whether or not to protrude from the upper surface is selected and output to the movement control means 1103 (step 1319). After the processing of this step 1319, the movement control means 1 is selected. 1 0 3 receives the output from the set value selection means 1 1 0 1 and operates the moving means 1 1 0 4 so as to perform a predetermined movement operation The control signal is output to move the center console unit 200 and the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are protruded if they are set to protrude, and stored in the housing unit 210. If the set value is to be set, it is stored in the housing 210 (step 1320). After the operation of step 1320, the operation returns to step 1301, and the operation units 241, 2442 are in an operation standby state. The operation processing after step 1301 is as described above. It will be the same.

また、 ステップ 1 3 1 8で 1ポジションの移動と判断されなかった場 合は、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が 2ポジションの移動か否かを判断し (ステップ 1 3 2 1 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 2 1で 2ポジションの移動と 判断された場合は、 ステップ 1 3 1 7の内容に基づき、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が、 現在のポジションに 2ポジションを加算したポジションに 対応するセンターコンソールュニット 2 0 0の移動方向及び移動距離 と、 表示部 2 2 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの表示部 設定値と、 操作部 2 3 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの 操作部設定値とを選択して移動制御手段 1 1 0 3に出力し (ステップ 1If it is not determined in step 1318 that the movement is one position, it is determined whether or not the setting value selecting means 1101 is a movement of two positions (step 1312). If it is determined that the position is moved by 2 positions in 1 3 2 1, based on the contents of step 13 17, the setting value selection unit 1 1 0 1 sets the center corresponding to the position obtained by adding 2 positions to the current position. The moving direction and moving distance of the console unit 200, the display unit setting value indicating whether or not the display unit 220 projects from the upper surface of the housing unit 210, and the operation unit 230 by the housing unit Whether to protrude from the upper surface of 210 Select the operation unit setting value and output it to the movement control means 1103 (Step 1

3 2 2 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 2 2の処理後、 移動制御手段 1 1 0 3が設 定値選択手段 1 1 0 1からの出力を受けて、 所定の移動動作を行うよう 移動手段 1 1 0 4に対して動作制御信号を出力してセンタ一コンソ一 ルュニット 2 0 0を移動させるとともに、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0 を突出させる設定値であれば突出させ、 筐体部 2 1 0内に収納させる設 定値であれば筐体部 2 1 0内に収納する (ステップ 1 3 2 3 ) 。 このス テツプ 1 3 2 3の動作後、 ステップ 1 3 0 1に戻り、 操作部 2 4 1、 23 2 2) After the processing of step 1 3 2 2, the movement control means 1 1 0 3 receives the output from the set value selection means 1 1 0 1 and performs a predetermined movement operation. The operation control signal is output to 4 and the center console unit 200 is moved, and the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are protruded if they are set to protrude. If the set value is to be stored in 10, it is stored in the housing 210 (step 1332). After the operation of step 1 3 2 3, return to step 1

4 2の操作待受状態となり、 ステップ 1 3 0 1以降の動作処理は上記説 明と同様になる。 The operation standby state of 42 is entered, and the operation processing after step 1301 is the same as described above.

また、 ステップ 1 3 2 1で 2ポジションの移動と判断されなかった場 合は、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が 3ポジションの移動か否かを判断し (ステップ 1 3 2 4 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 2 4で 3ポジションの移動と 判断された場合は、 ステップ 1 3 1 7の内容に基づき、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が、 現在のポジションに 3ポジションを加算したポジションに 対応するセン夕一コンソ一ルュニッ 卜 2 0 0の移動方向及び移動距離 と、 表示部 2 2 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの表示部 設定値と、 操作部 2 3 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの 操作部設定値とを選択して移動制御手段 1 1 0 3に出力し (ステップ 1 3 2 5 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 2 5の処理後、 移動制御手段 1 1 0 3が設 定値選択手段 1 1 0 1からの出力を受けて、 所定の移動動作を行うよう 移動手段 1 1 0 4に対して動作制御信号を出力してセンターコンソ一 ルュニッ卜 2 0 0を移動させるとともに、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0 を突出させる設定値であれば突出させ、 筐体部 2 1 0内に収納させる設 定値であれば筐体部 2 1 0内に収納する (ステップ 1 3 2 6 ) 。 このス テツプ 1 3 2 6の動作後、 ステップ 1 3 0 1に戻り、 操作部 2 4 1、 2 4 2の操作待受状態となり、 ステップ 1 3 0 1以降の動作処理は上記説 明と同様になる。 If it is not determined in step 1 3 2 1 that the movement is 2 positions, it is determined whether or not the setting value selection means 1 101 is a 3 position movement (step 1 3 2 4). If it is determined that the position is moved by 3 positions in 1 3 2 4, the setting value selection means 1 101 selects the sensor corresponding to the position obtained by adding 3 positions to the current position, based on the contents of step 13 17. The moving direction and moving distance of the evening console unit 200, the display unit setting value indicating whether or not the display unit 220 is projected from the upper surface of the housing unit 210, and the operation unit 230 are displayed. The operation section set value for whether or not to protrude from the upper surface of the housing section 210 is selected and output to the movement control means 1103 (step 1325), and the processing of this step 1325 is performed. Thereafter, the movement control means 1103 receives the output from the set value selection means 110101 and performs a predetermined movement operation. (1) An operation control signal is output to the moving means 111 to move the center console 200 and move the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230. If the set value is to be stored in the housing section 210, it is stored in the housing section 210 (step 1326). After the operation of step 1 3 2 6, return to step 1 The operation standby state of 42 is entered, and the operation processing after step 1301 is the same as described above.

また、 ステップ 1 3 2 4で 3ポジションの移動と判断されなかった場 合は、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が 4ポジションの移動と判断し、 ステツ プ 1 3 1 7の内容に基づき、 設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が、 現在のポジシ ヨンに 4ポジションを加算したポジションに対応するセン夕一コンソ ールュニット 2 0 0の移動方向及び移動距離と、 表示部 2 2 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの表示部設定値と、 操作部 2 3 0を 筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか否かの操作部設定値とを選択し て移動制御手段 1 1 0 3に出力し (ステップ 1 3 2 7 ) 、 このステップ 1 3 2 7の処理後、 移動制御手段 1 1 0 3が設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1か らの出力を受けて、 所定の移動動作を行うよう移動手段 1 1 0 4に対し て動作制御信号を出力してセンタ一コンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0を移動 させるとともに、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0を収納させる (ステップ 1 3 2 8 )。 このステップ 1 3 2 8の動作後、ステップ 1 3 0 1に戻り、 操作部 2 4 1 、 2 4 2の操作待受状態となり、 ステップ 1 3 0 1以降の 動作処理は上記説明と同様になる。  Also, if it is not determined in step 1324 that the movement is 3 positions, the setting value selection means 1 101 determines that the movement is 4 positions, and the setting is performed based on the contents of step 1317. The value selection means 1 101 is used to move the sensing direction and the moving distance of the sensor console 200 corresponding to the position obtained by adding 4 positions to the current position, and the display unit 220 to the housing unit 211. The display control unit 1 selects a display unit setting value as to whether or not to protrude from the upper surface of the housing unit 0 and an operation unit set value as to whether the operating unit 230 is to protrude from the upper surface of the housing unit 210. Output to 103 (step 1327), and after the processing of step 1327, the movement control means 1103 receives the output from the set value selection means 1101 and An operation control signal is output to the moving means 111 to perform the moving operation, and the center console unit 200 is moved. The display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are stored (step 1328). After the operation of step 1328, the process returns to step 1301, and the operation unit 2411 and 2442 are in an operation standby state. The operation processing after step 1301 is the same as described above. .

なお、 ステップ 1 3 1 5で設定値選択手段 1 1 0 1が操作部 4 2 2の 操作は行われていないと判断した際は、 ステップ 1 3 0 1に戻り、 操作 部 2 4 1 、 2 4 2の操作待受状態となり、 ステップ 1 3 0 1以降の動作 処理は上記説明と同様になる。  If the setting value selection means 1 101 determines in step 1 3 15 that the operation of the operation section 4 2 2 has not been performed, the flow returns to step 1 310 and the operation sections 2 4 1 and 2 The operation standby state of 42 is entered, and the operation processing after step 1301 is the same as described above.

次に、 本実施の形態 2では、 移動体用機器配設装置に加えて、 撮像手 段としてのカメラ 1 0 8、 2 5 0を用いた移動体用情報処理装置を備え ており、 以下、 この移動体用情報処理装置について第 1図、 第 2図、 第 1 9図〜第 2 1図を用いて説明する。  Next, in the second embodiment, in addition to the mobile device arrangement device, a mobile information processing device using cameras 108 and 250 as imaging means is provided. This mobile information processing apparatus will be described with reference to FIGS. 1, 2, and 19 to 21.

第 1 9図は、 カメラ 1 0 8、 2 5 0を用いた移動体用情報処理装置の 概略構成を示した概略構成図、 第 2 0図は、 第 1 9図の要部としての力 メラにて撮影対象となる撮影対象物を示す説明図、 第 2 0図は第 1 8図 の移動体用情報処理装置の動作の流れを示すフロ一チャートである。 FIG. 19 shows an information processing apparatus for a mobile body using cameras 108 and 250. FIG. 20 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration, FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram showing an object to be photographed by a camera as a main part of FIG. 19, and FIG. 20 is a diagram of FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of an operation of the information processing apparatus for a mobile body.

1 0 8はィンストウルメントパネル 1 0 2に設けられた撮像手段と してのカメラであり、 2 5 0はセンターコンソールユニット 2 0 0の前 面部に設けられた撮像手段としてのカメラである。  Reference numeral 108 denotes a camera provided as an imaging means provided on the instrument panel 102, and reference numeral 250 denotes a camera provided as an imaging means provided on a front portion of the center console unit 200. .

これらカメラ 1 0 8、 2 5 0は、 同じ機能を有しており、 カメラ 1 0 8 , 2 5 0の前部に撮影対象物を翳して可視情報を撮影するものであり、 この撮影対象物とは、 例えば、 物を購入した際にその店から発行される レシートや、新聞の折り込みチラシ、観光ガイドブック等の内容である。 これら情報源をカメラ 1 0 8、 2 5 0で取り込み、 ィンストウルメン トパネル 1 0 2に設けられた表示部 1 0 6やセンターコンソールュニ ッ ト 2 0 0に設けられた表示部 2 2 0に表示されるようになっている。  The cameras 108 and 250 have the same function, and capture the visible information by holding the object to be photographed in front of the cameras 108 and 250. The contents are, for example, the contents of a receipt issued from the store when a product is purchased, a leaflet for inserting a newspaper, a tourist guidebook, and the like. These information sources are captured by the cameras 108 and 250 and displayed on the display unit 106 provided on the instrument panel 102 and the display unit 220 provided on the center console unit 200. It is supposed to be.

1 9 0 1は、 カメラ 1 0 8、 2 5 0で撮影され、 出力された可視情報 と後述する記憶手段に記憶されたカメラ 1 0 8、 2 5 0で撮影された可 視情報を解析するための可視情報が示された辞書情報とを比較して解 析する解析手段、 1 9 0 2は解析手段 1 9 0 1がカメラ 1 0 8、 2 5 0 で撮影した可視情報の内容を解析する際に比較対象とする可視情報と しての辞書情報を記憶した記憶手段であり、 この記憶手段 1 9 0 2には、 図形や記号、 アルファベットやひらがな、 かたかな、 漢字、 数字等の文 字を認識する上で必要な辞書情報を記憶している。 また、 1 9 0 3は解 析手段 1 9 0 1の解析結果を表示手段 1 0 6、 2 2 0に対して出力し、 表示させるよう制御する表示制御手段であり、 移動体用情報処理装置は これらから構成されている。  19001 analyzes the visible information captured and output by the cameras 108 and 250 and the visible information captured by the cameras 108 and 250 stored in the storage means described later. Analysis means for comparing and analyzing the dictionary information showing the visible information for analysis, 1902 analyzes the contents of the visible information taken by the analysis means 1901 with the cameras 108 and 250 This is a storage unit that stores dictionary information as visible information to be compared when performing this operation.This storage unit 1902 stores figures, symbols, alphabets, hiragana, katakana, kanji, numbers, etc. It stores dictionary information necessary for recognizing characters. Reference numeral 1903 denotes display control means for outputting the analysis result of the analysis means 1901 to the display means 106 and 220, and controlling the display so as to display the information. Is composed of these.

第 2 0図は、 店で発行されるレシートの表示例であり、 2 0 0 1は店 名、 2 0 0 2はその店の所在地 (住所) 、 2 0 0 3は購入日、 2 0 0 4 は支払い対象の品名、 200 5は支払いの内訳である。 FIG. 20 shows a display example of a receipt issued at a store, where 2001 is the store name, 2002 is the address (address) of the store, 2003 is the purchase date, and 200 Four Is the name of the item to be paid, and 2005 is the breakdown of the payment.

この第 2 0図に用いられた各情報 2 0 0 1〜 2 0 0 5をカメラ 1 0 8かカメラ 2 5 0で撮影し、 この撮影した内容が記憶手段 1 90 2に記 憶されている辞書情報と比較して解析手段 1 90 1が解析、 即ち、 各情 報 2 0 0 1〜 2 0 0 5の文字情報等の認識を行い、 この認識結果 (解析 結果) を表示部 1 0 6か表示部 22 0に表示するものである。  Each piece of information 200 1 to 200 5 used in FIG. 20 is photographed by the camera 108 or the camera 250, and the photographed contents are stored in the storage means 1902. The analysis means 1901 performs analysis in comparison with the dictionary information, that is, recognizes the character information and the like of each piece of information 201 to 205, and displays the recognition result (analysis result) on the display section 106. Is displayed on the display unit 220.

次に動作について第 2 1図を用いて説明する。 この第 2 1図は、 移動 体用情報処理装置の動作の流れを示すフローチャートである。  Next, the operation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the flow of the operation of the mobile information processing apparatus.

まず、 自動車の電源が投入されると装置への撮像操作を待つ受ける待 受状態となり(ステップ 2 1 00)、 動作が開始される。 次にカメラ 1 0 8かカメラ 2 5 0から可視情報を読み取つたか否かを解析手段 1 9 0 1が判断し (ステップ 2 1 0 1) 、 このステップ 2 1 0 1で可視情報を 読み取つたと判断した場合は、 解析手段 1 9 0 1が記憶手段 19 02か らカメラで読み取った可視情報に対応した情報がどの情報に該当する のか選別して抽出し、 解析を行う (ステップ 2 1 02) 。  First, when the power of the automobile is turned on, the apparatus enters a standby state of waiting for an imaging operation on the apparatus (step 2100), and the operation is started. Next, the analyzing means 1901 determines whether or not the visible information has been read from the camera 108 or the camera 250 (step 2101), and the visible information is read in this step 201. If it is determined that the information corresponds to the information corresponding to the visible information read by the camera from the storage means 1902, the analyzing means 19001 selects and extracts the information, and performs analysis (step 2102). ).

このステップ 2 1 0 2で解析された結果が、 解析手段 1 90 1から出 力されたか否か表示制御手段 1 9 0 3が判断し (ステップ 2 1 0 3) 、 このステップ 2 1 03で解析結果が出力されたと判断した場合は、 この 結果を表示部 1 0 6か表示部 22 0に表示する (ステップ 2 1 04) 。  The display control means 1903 determines whether or not the result analyzed in step 2102 has been output from the analyzing means 1901 (step 2103). If it is determined that the result has been output, the result is displayed on the display unit 106 or the display unit 220 (step 2104).

このステップ 2 1 04の処理が完了後、 再度ステップ 2 1 0 1に戻り、 撮像操作を待つ受ける待受状態となり、 ステップ 2 1 0 1以下、 上記と 同様の処理が行われる。  After the processing of step 210 is completed, the flow returns to step 211 again to be in a standby state of waiting for an imaging operation, and the same processing as above is performed in step 211 and subsequent steps.

なお、 解析手段 1 9 0 1がステップ 2 1 0 1で可視情報を読み取って いないと判断した場合は、 再度、 ステップ 2 1 0 1に戻り、 撮像操作を 待つ受ける待受状態となり、 ステップ 2 1 0 1以下、 上記と同様の処理 が行われる。 また、 ステップ 2 1 0 3で解析結果が出力されないと判断した場合は, 再度ステップ 2 1 0 3に戻り、 解析結果が出力されるまで待受状態とな る。 If the analyzing means 1901 determines that the visible information has not been read in step 2101, it returns to step 2101 again, and enters a standby state of waiting for an imaging operation. 01 and below, the same processing as above is performed. If it is determined that the analysis result is not output in step 2103, the process returns to step 2103 and waits until the analysis result is output.

従って、 上記のように、 自動車 1 0 0の運転席 1 2 1と助手席 1 2 2 との間に挟まれる位置に設けられ、 C Dプレーヤやカセットテ一ププレ ーャ、 D V Dプレーヤ等を配設可能にした配設手段に、 これら装置への 操作を行う操作部と、 これら装置の可視情報を映像として表示する表示 手段とを収納可能で且つ突出可能に構成されたセンタ一コンソールュ ニット 2 0 0をレール部 1 1 0に沿って移動可能にし、 各座席それぞれ に対応したセンタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0の移動設定値、 表示部 2 2 0の突出設定値、 及び操作部 2 3 0の突出設定値を予め記憶しておき、 操作内容によって適正にセンターコンソールュニッ 卜 2 0 0を使用で きるよう構成したことにより、 どの席の着座者においても、 音響機器や 映像再生機器への適切な位置での操作が可能となり、 操作に基づき、 セ ンタ一コンソールュニッ 卜 2 0 0を各座席の着座者に対応した位置ま で自動的に移動されるので、 使用者自らがセンターコンソールュニット 2 0 0の位置を微調整しながら決めなくても、 自動的に最適な位置に設 定されるため、 設定操作の煩わしさが解消され、 使用者の利便性が向上 する。 即ち、 操作部への操作のみで自動的に表示部 2 2 0や操作部 2 3 0を上方へ突出させたり、 収納させることができるので、 このような煩 わしい動作を解消でき、 使用者の利便性が向上するものである。  Therefore, as described above, it is provided at a position sandwiched between the driver's seat 121 and the passenger seat 122 of the automobile 100, so that a CD player, a cassette tape player, a DVD player, etc. can be arranged. The operating unit for operating these devices and the display means for displaying the visual information of these devices as images can be housed in the arranged arrangement means, and the center console unit 200 which can be protruded is railed. It is possible to move along the section 110, and the set value of the center console unit 200 corresponding to each seat, the set value of the display unit 220, and the set value of the operation unit 230 are set. Is stored in advance and the center console unit 200 can be used properly according to the operation content, so that any person sitting in any seat can use the appropriate position for audio equipment and video playback equipment. Can be operated Based on the operation, the center console unit 200 is automatically moved to the position corresponding to the occupant of each seat, so the user himself / herself fine-tunes the position of the center console unit 200. Even if you do not make a decision, the position is automatically set to the optimal position, which eliminates the hassle of the setting operation and improves the convenience for the user. That is, the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 can be automatically protruded upward or stored by only operating the operation unit, so that such a troublesome operation can be eliminated. The convenience of the system is improved.

また、 店が発行したレシ一卜等の可視情報を自動車内に設置された力 メラで読み取り、 この解析結果を自動車内に設けられた表示部に表示で きるので、 使用者の利便性が向上する。 実施の形態 3 . 次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 3に係る移動体用機器配設装置につい て説明する。 In addition, visible information such as receipts issued by stores can be read by a camera installed in the car, and the results of this analysis can be displayed on a display unit installed in the car, improving user convenience. I do. Embodiment 3. Next, a mobile device installation device according to another embodiment 3 of the present invention will be described.

上記した実施の形態 1、 2では、 記憶手段 1 1 0 2には第 1 2図に示 す各設定値が記憶されていると説明したが、 これら設定値は初期設定値 として各設定値を使用者が適宜変更可能に構成してもよく、 このように 構成することにより使用者の利便性がさらに向上する。 実施の形態 4 .  In Embodiments 1 and 2 described above, it has been described that the set values shown in FIG. 12 are stored in the storage means 1102, but these set values are used as initial set values. The configuration may be such that the user can change it as appropriate, and this configuration further improves the convenience for the user. Embodiment 4.

次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 4に係る移動体用機器配設装置につい て説明する。  Next, a mobile device arrangement device according to another embodiment 4 of the present invention will be described.

上記した実施の形態 1〜 3では、 センターコンソールュニッ卜 2 0 0、 2 2 3 0を移動動作させる際、 センタ一コンソールユニット 2 0 0、 2 2 3 0の前面部に設けられた操作部 2 4 1、 2 4 2、 2 2 7 2、 2 2 7 3を操作するよう説明していたが、 各座席ごとにリモートコントローラ — (図示せず) を設けておき、 これらリモートコントローラ一からの操 作でもセンターコンソールュニッ卜の移動を可能に構成しても良く、 こ のように構成したことにより、 使用者の操作性がさらに向上する。 実施の形態 5 .  In the above-described first to third embodiments, when the center console units 200 and 230 are moved, the operation unit provided on the front part of the center console unit 200 and 230 is operated. Although it was explained that 2 4 1, 2 4 2, 2 2 7 2 and 2 2 7 3 were operated, a remote controller (not shown) was provided for each seat, and these remote controllers In operation, the center console unit may be configured to be movable, and the operability for the user is further improved by such a configuration. Embodiment 5

次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 5に係る移動体用機器配設装置につい て説明する。  Next, a mobile device arrangement device according to another embodiment 5 of the present invention will be described.

上記した実施の形態 1〜4では、 センタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0 に設けられた表示部 2 2 0は上下方向に移動することのみ説明したが、 表示面と表示部 2 2 0の支持部 2 2 1との間に表示部 2 2 0を上下左 右方向に向きを調節できる方向調節機構を設けても良く、 このように構 成したことにより、 使用者の体型等に合わせることができ、 使用者が表 示部 2 2 0の表示面を見る際、 最適な角度で見ることができるため、 使 用者の利便性がさらに向上する。 実施の形態 6 . In the above-described first to fourth embodiments, it has been described that the display unit 220 provided in the center console unit 200 only moves vertically, but the display surface and the support unit of the display unit 220 are described. A direction adjustment mechanism that can adjust the direction of the display unit 220 up, down, left, and right may be provided between the unit and the unit 2 21. With this configuration, it is possible to match the user's body type, etc. , User When viewing the display surface of the display unit 220, it is possible to view the display at an optimum angle, thereby further improving the convenience for the user. Embodiment 6

次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 6に係る移動体用表示装置及び移動体 用表示装置について説明する。  Next, a moving object display device and a moving object display device according to another embodiment 6 of the present invention will be described.

上記した実施の形態 1では、 天井部 2 2 0 0に設けられたセンターコ ンソールュニッ卜 2 2 3 0が、 天井部 2 2 0 0に設けられたレール部 2 2 2 0に案内されて自動車の前後方向に移動可能なように説明したが、 本実施の形態 6では、 実施の形態 1と同様の移動体用機器配設装置を自 動車内の床部に移動可能に設けるとともに、 天井部には移動体用表示装 置を天井部の所定箇所、 例えば第 3 0図に示すように自動車内に設けら れた前席と中間席との間に固定させて設けても良い。  In the first embodiment described above, the center console unit 230 provided on the ceiling 220 is guided by the rail 220 provided on the ceiling 220 so that Although described as being movable in the front-rear direction, in the sixth embodiment, the same mobile device arrangement device as in the first embodiment is provided movably on the floor in the vehicle, and is mounted on the ceiling. The mobile device display device may be fixedly provided at a predetermined location on the ceiling, for example, between a front seat and an intermediate seat provided in an automobile as shown in FIG.

第 3 0図は実施の形態 6の移動体用表示装置及び移動体用機器配設 装置の概略構成を示す概略構成図、 第 3 1図は第 3 0図の要部構成を示 すブロック図、 第 3 2図は実施の形態 6の移動体用表示装置の動作の流 れを示すフローチャート、 第 3 3図ば第 3 0図の要部である表示部を筐 体部内に収納した状態を示す説明図、 第 3 4図は第 3 0図の要部である 表示部を筐体部内に収納した状態を示す説明図である。  FIG. 30 is a schematic configuration diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mobile display device and a mobile device installation device according to Embodiment 6, and FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing a main configuration of FIG. 30. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the flow of the operation of the display device for a mobile object according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 33 shows a state in which the display unit, which is a main part of FIG. 30, is housed in the housing. FIG. 34 is an explanatory view showing a state where the display unit, which is a main part of FIG. 30, is housed in the housing.

これら図において、 自動車 1 0 0内の床部には運転席と助手席との間 に設けられたレール部 1 1 0と、 このレール部の溝部内に案内され A方 向または B方向に移動するセンターコンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0とで構 成された移動体用機器配設装置と、 天井部 2 2 0 0には運転席上方に設 けられた主に後方の映像を表示するルームミラー 2 2 1 0と、 前席より 後席の搭乗者が主に利用する表示ュニッ ト 3 0 0 0とで構成された移 動体用表示装置とが備えられている。 ルームミラ一 2 2 1 0の後方視界 は破線で示している。 In these figures, a rail section 110 provided between a driver's seat and a passenger's seat is provided on the floor of a car 100, and is guided in the groove of the rail section to move in the A or B direction. A mobile device installation device consisting of a center console unit 200 that operates, and a room mirror that is installed above the driver's seat and that displays mainly rearward images is installed on the ceiling 220. There is provided a mobile display device composed of 2201 and a display unit 30000 mainly used by passengers in the front and rear seats. Room Mira 1 2 2 1 0 rear view Is indicated by a broken line.

表示ュニット 3 0 0 0は、 一部に表示部 3 0 2 0 (後述する) が収納 される収納部 3 0 2 1を形成した筐体部 3 0 1 0と、 この筐体部 3 0 1 0の収納部 3 0 2 1に収納可能であり、 使用者が使用する際、 係止部 3 0 1 2の係止を外しながら表示面を下方に突出させる表示部 3 0 2 0 と、 表示部 3 0 2 0の後方 (第 3 0図では手前側) に設けられ、 指令に 基づき 3 6 0 ° 方向の撮影が可能な撮像手段としてのカメラ 3 0 3 0 とで構成されている。  The display unit 3100 includes a housing section 310 in which a storage section 3201 in which a display section 3200 (described later) is partially stored is formed, and the housing section 3101. The display section 3 0 2 0 can be stored in the storage section 3 0 2 1 and the display section 3 0 2 0 projects the display surface downward while releasing the locking section 3 0 1 2 when the user uses it. The camera is provided behind the unit 320 (in FIG. 30, on the near side), and includes a camera 3030 as an imaging unit capable of capturing an image in a 360 ° direction based on a command.

次に、 第 3 1図、 第 3 2図を用いて本実施の形態 6の動作制御を行な う主要部の構成、 及び動作の流れについて説明する。  Next, the configuration of the main part that performs the operation control of the sixth embodiment and the flow of the operation will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32.

図において、 3 1 0 0は自動車外から指令を送信する送信部 3 1 0 1 及び受信部 3 1 0 2を設けた第 1通信手段であり、 この第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0には、 受信部 3 1 0 2で受信した可視情報を表示する第 3の表示 手段としての表示部 3 1 0 3を設けている。  In the figure, reference numeral 3100 denotes a first communication unit provided with a transmission unit 3101 and a reception unit 3102 for transmitting a command from outside the vehicle, and the first communication unit 3100 includes: The display unit 310 is provided as third display means for displaying the visible information received by the receiving unit 310.

3 1 1 0は、 後述する撮像手段 3 1 2 0が撮影した映像情報を第 1通 信手段 3 1 0 0の受信部 3 1 0 2に対して送信する送信部 3 1 1 1と 第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0の送信部 3 1 0 1から送信された信号を受信す る受信部 3 1 1 2とを設けた第 2通信手段である。  Reference numeral 3110 denotes a transmitting unit 311 and a transmitting unit 311 for transmitting video information captured by an imaging unit 3120 described later to a receiving unit 3102 of the first communication unit 3100. This is a second communication unit provided with a reception unit 3112 that receives a signal transmitted from the transmission unit 3101 of the communication unit 3100.

本実施の形態 6の移動体用機器配設装置及び移動体用表示装置を備 えた自動車の所有者が自宅にいる時、 駐車場に駐車している自己の自動 車が悪戯や盗難などに遭っていないか等で自動車の周辺や室内等の様 子を知りたい際に、 第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0の送信部 3 1 0 1から自動車 内の周辺を撮影するよう操作して指令信号を送信し、 この送信部 3 1 0 1から送信された指定信号を第 2通信手段 3 1 1 0の受信部 3 1 1 2 が受信し、 操作手段 2 6 0 3を介して撮像手段 3 0 3 0が撮影するよう に撮像手段 3 0 3 0に対して導通する。 このとき、 操作者が自動車の周 辺、 即ち、 自動車の周囲である 3 6 0 ° の映像や、 特定の方向を見たい ときには、 この指令も送信部 3 1 0 1から送信されるため、 撮影方向変 更手段 2 6 0 4にて撮像手段 3 0 3 0の撮影方向を指令する。 When the owner of a vehicle equipped with the mobile device disposition device and the mobile device display device according to the sixth embodiment is at home, his or her own vehicle parked in the parking lot encounters mischief or theft. When you want to know the surroundings of the car or the interior of the car, etc., you need to operate the transmitter 3101 of the first communication means 3100 to shoot the surroundings inside the car and send the command signal. The receiving unit 3 1 1 2 of the second communication unit 3 1 1 2 receives the designated signal transmitted from the transmitting unit 3 1 0 1, and the imaging unit 3 0 3 via the operation unit 2 6 3 Conduction is made to the imaging means 300 so that 0 captures an image. At this time, the operator When the user wants to see the side, that is, the 360 ° image around the car, or a specific direction, this command is also transmitted from the transmitting unit 3101 so that the photographing direction changing means 2604 To instruct the imaging direction of the imaging means 3030.

これを受けて撮像手段 3 0 3 0は所定方向の撮影を行ない、 この撮影 された映像情報を第 2通信手段の送信部 3 1 1 1に出力して送信部 3 1 1 1から第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0に向けて送信する。  In response to this, the imaging means 3 0 3 0 shoots in a predetermined direction, outputs the shot video information to the transmitting section 3 1 1 1 of the second communication means, and outputs the information from the transmitting section 3 1 1 1 to the first communication. Transmit to means 3100.

この送信を受けて第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0の受信部 3 1 0 2が送信信 号を受信し、 この受信に基づき、 撮像手段 3 0 3 0が撮影した映像を第 3表示手段 3 1 0 3に表示させるように構成されている。  In response to this transmission, the receiving section 3102 of the first communication means 3100 receives the transmission signal, and based on this reception, displays the video taken by the imaging means 310 on the third display means 31 0 3 is displayed.

ここで、 第 1の通信手段 3 1 0 0について、 第 3 5図、 第 3 6図を用 いて説明する。  Here, the first communication means 3100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.

第 3 5図は、 第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0として携帯電話 3 5 0 0を用いた ものであり、 この携帯電話 3 5 0 0は、 第 3表示手段としての表示部 3 5 1 0と、 第 2通信手段 3 2 0 0に対して指令信号を出力する操作部 3 5 2 0とで構成されている。 なお、 図示していないが、 携帯電話 3 5 0 0の内部に送信部 3 5 0 1と受信部 3 5 0 2が設けられている。 表示部 3 5 1 0に表示されている内容は、 カメラ 3 0 3 0の撮影方向を前方と して撮影したものである。  FIG. 35 shows a case where a mobile phone 350 is used as the first communication means 310, and the mobile phone 350 has a display section 3501 as a third display means. And an operation unit 3502 for outputting a command signal to the second communication means 3200. Although not shown, a transmitting unit 3501 and a receiving unit 3502 are provided inside the mobile phone 350. The content displayed on the display section 3510 is obtained by shooting with the shooting direction of the camera 3030 being forward.

また、 第 3 6図は、 第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0としてパーソナルコンビュ 一夕 (以下、 パソコンと称す) 3 6 0 0を用いたものであり、 パソコン 本体 3 6 1 0と、 このパソコン本体 3 6 1 0からの情報を表示する表示 部 3 6 2 0と、 パソコン本体 3 6 1 0に対して操作を行なう操作部であ るキ一ボ一ド 3 6 3 0とから構成されている。  FIG. 36 shows a personal computer (hereinafter referred to as a personal computer) 3600 used as the first communication means 3100. The personal computer body 3601 and the personal computer body It is composed of a display section 3620 that displays information from the 3610 and a keyboard 3630 that is an operation section for operating the personal computer 3610. .

なお、 図示していないが、 パソコン本体 3 6 1 0には外部と通信する 通信アダプタが設けられており、 この通信アダプタにより送信部 3 5 0 1と受信部 3 5 0 2との機能を有している。 表示部 3 6 2 0の表示面 3 6 2 1に表示されている内容は、 第 3 5図と同様で、 カメラ 3 0 3 0の 撮影方向を前方として撮影したものである。 Although not shown, the PC 3601 is provided with a communication adapter for communicating with the outside, and the communication adapter has the functions of the transmitting unit 3501 and the receiving unit 3502. are doing. Display 3 6 2 0 Display surface 3 The contents displayed in 6 21 are the same as those in FIG. 35, and are images taken with the imaging direction of the camera 310 being forward.

以上のように、 通常の撮像手段 3 0 3 0は、 自動車の電源操作である イダニッシヨンを O Nし、 第 2表示手段 2 2 5 0の収納状態に基づいて 動作制御されるが、 操作手段 2 6 0 3と撮像方向変更手段 2 6 0 4を介 して指令があれば導通状態となるように構成されている。  As described above, the normal imaging means 3030 turns on the indication which is a power operation of the car, and the operation is controlled based on the stored state of the second display means 222, but the operation means 26 It is configured to be in a conductive state when there is a command via the imaging direction changing means 26 and the imaging direction changing means 26.

次に、 第 3 2図を用いて本実施の形態 6の動作の流れについて説明す る。  Next, the operation flow of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

まず、 初期状態で動作が開始され (ステップ 3 2 0 0 ) 、 イダニッシ 3ンが O F Fか O Nかを判断し (ステップ 3 2 0 1 ) 、 このステップ 3 First, the operation is started in the initial state (step 3200), and it is determined whether the identification 3 is OFF or ON (step 3201).

2 0 1でイダニッシヨン O F Fと判断した場合は、 第 1通信手段 3 1 0 .0から指令信号が送信されたか否かを第 2通信手段 3 1 1 0の受信部If it is determined in step 201 that the signal is the identification OFF, the receiving unit of the second communication unit 3110 determines whether or not a command signal has been transmitted from the first communication unit 31.0.

3 1 1 2が判断する (ステップ 3 2 0 2 ) 。 3 1 1 2 judges (step 3 2 0 2).

このステップ 3 2 0 2で指令信号を受信したと第 2通信手段 3 1 1 0の受信部 3 1 1 2が判断した場合は、 第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0から送信 された指令信号に撮像手段 3 0 3 0の撮像方向を変更する指令が含ま れているか否かの判断を第 2通信手段 3 1 1 0の受信部 3 1 1 2が行 なう (ステップ 3 2 0 3 ) 。  If the receiving section 311 of the second communication means 311 determines that the command signal has been received in step 3202, the image is taken by the command signal transmitted from the first communication means 3100. The receiving unit 3111 of the second communication unit 3110 determines whether or not an instruction to change the imaging direction of the unit 3030 is included (step 3203).

このステップ 3 2 0 3で撮像方向の変更があると判断した場合は、 撮 像方向変更手段 2 6 0 3が撮像手段 3 0 3 0の撮像方向を指令に基づ いて変更し (ステップ 3 2 0 4 ) 、 操作手段 2 6 0 4が撮像手段 3 0 3 0に対して撮影を開始させる (ステップ 3 2 0 5 ) 。  If it is determined in step 3203 that there is a change in the imaging direction, the imaging direction changing unit 2603 changes the imaging direction of the imaging unit 3030 based on the command (step 3203). 0 4), and the operating means 260 4 starts the photographing of the imaging means 30 30 (step 3 205).

このステップ 3 2 0 5で撮影された映像情報を第 2通信手段 3 1 1 0の送信部 3 1 1 1が第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0に向けて送信し (ステップ 3 2 0 6 ) 、 撮影終了の指令が第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0から送信されたか 否かを第 2通信手段 3 1 1 0の受信部 3 1 1 2が判断し (ステップ 3 2 0 7 ) 、 このステップ 3 2 0 7で撮影終了の指令があつたと判断した場 合は、 撮像手段 3 0 3 0の撮影を終了し (ステップ 3 2 0 8 ) 、 ステツ プ 3 2 0 1に戻り、 処理を繰り返す。 The transmitting section 3111 of the second communication means 31110 transmits the video information captured in step 3205 to the first communication means 3110 (step 3206), The receiving unit 3 1 1 2 of the second communication means 311 determines whether or not a command to end the shooting has been transmitted from the first communication means 3 1 0 0 (step 3 2 0 7), if it is determined in step 3207 that the command to end the shooting has been given, the shooting by the imaging means 3030 is ended (step 3208), and the process returns to step 3201. Return and repeat the process.

また、 ステップ 3 2 0 1でイダニッシヨンが O N状態と判断した場合 は、 第 2 7図に示すステップ 1 7 0 1へ進み、 以降の動作を行なう。 また、 ステップ 3 2 0 2で第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0からの指令信号が送 信されていないと判断した場合は、 再度ステップ 3 2 0 1に戻り、 動作 を繰り返す。  If it is determined in step 3201 that the indication is in the ON state, the process proceeds to step 1701 shown in FIG. 27 to perform the subsequent operations. If it is determined in step 3202 that the command signal from the first communication means 3100 has not been transmitted, the process returns to step 3201 again to repeat the operation.

さらに、 ステップ 3 2 0 3で撮像手段 3 0 3 0の撮影方向を変更する 指令信号が受信されなかった場合は、 撮像手段 3 0 3 0の撮影方向は現 在、 設定されている方向でいいと判断して撮影方向を変更せずに撮像手 段 3 0 3 0の撮影を開始する (ステップ 3 2 0 9 ) 。  Further, if no command signal for changing the photographing direction of the image pickup means 3003 is received in step 3203, the photographing direction of the image pickup means 3300 may be the direction currently set. Thus, the photographing of the photographing means 310 is started without changing the photographing direction (step 3209).

また、 ステップ 3 2 0 7で撮影終了の指令が第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0か ら送信されなていないと判断した場合は、 再度、 ステップ 3 2 0 6に戻 り、 処理を繰り返す。  If it is determined in step 3207 that a command to end photographing has not been transmitted from the first communication means 3100, the process returns to step 3206 again, and the processing is repeated.

なお、 第 3 3図、 第 3 4図は自動車の右後方から見た説明図であり、 第 3 3図は表示ュニッ 卜 3 0 0 0に設けられた表示部 3 0 2 0を収納 し、 撮像手段であるカメラ 3 0 3 0の撮影方向は自動車後方 (第 3 3図 では手前側) に向いている状態を示しており、 第 3 4図は係止部 3 0 1 2を操作して筐体部 3 0 1 0に形成された表示部 3 0 2 0の収納部 3 0 1 1から下方に突出させた状態を示している。 カメラ 3 0 3 0の撮影 方向は第 3 3図と同じである。  FIG. 33 and FIG. 34 are explanatory views as viewed from the right rear of the automobile, and FIG. 33 stores the display unit 300 provided in the display unit 300. The photographing direction of the camera 3030 as an image pickup means is in a state of facing the rear of the automobile (in FIG. 33, the front side), and FIG. 34 shows a state in which the locking section 3102 is operated. The figure shows a state in which the display unit is protruded downward from the storage section 310 of the display section 320 formed in the housing section 310. The shooting direction of the camera 3030 is the same as in FIG.

従って、 上記したように本実施の形態 6では、 携帯電話 3 5 0 0ゃパ ソコン 3 6 0 0と通信する第 2通信手段を自動車内に設け、 自動車内が 無人の時でも、 第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0としての携帯電話 3 5 0 0ゃパソ コン 3 6 0 0を用いて自動車室内や周囲の映像を見ることができるよ う構成したので、 無人自動車の監視を簡単に行なえ、 使用者の利便性が 向上するという効果が得られる。 実施の形態 7 . Therefore, as described above, in the sixth embodiment, the second communication means for communicating with the mobile phone 350 and the personal computer 360 is provided in the car, and the first communication means is provided even when the car is unmanned. You can use the mobile phone 3500 as a means 3100 to view images in the car interior and surroundings using a personal computer 3600. With this configuration, monitoring of unmanned vehicles can be easily performed, and the effect of improving user convenience is obtained. Embodiment 7

次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 7に係る移動体用表示装置を用いた移 動体用機器配設装置について第 3 7図〜第 3 9図を用いて説明する。 第 3 7図は自動車内に設けられた中間席にチヤィルドシートを搭載 し、 このチヤィルドシートに幼児が着座している状態を示した説明図、 第 3 8図は撮像手段としてのカメラ 3 0 3 0でチャイルドシ一トに着 座している幼児を撮影した映像を自動車内に設けた表示部に表示して いる状態を示す説明図、 第 3 9図は第 3 8図で説明した表示部の表示拡 大図である。  Next, a mobile device installation device using a mobile display device according to Embodiment 7 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. FIG. FIG. 37 is an explanatory view showing a state in which a child seat is mounted on an intermediate seat provided in an automobile, and an infant is seated on the seat, and FIG. 38 is a camera 300 as an image pickup means. Explanatory drawing showing the image of a child sitting in a child seat taken on the display provided in the car.Fig. 39 shows the display of the display described in Fig. 38. It is an enlarged view.

上記した実施の形態 6では、 外部の第 1通信手段 3 1 0 0に自動車室 内の様子や自動車の周囲の様子を送信するよう説明したが、 カメラ 3 0 3 0で撮影した自動車室内の映像を自動車内のィンストウルメントパ ネル 1 0 2に設けられた表示装置 1 0 6に表示させるようにしてもよ レ^  In Embodiment 6 described above, the state inside the car room and the state around the car are transmitted to the external first communication means 3100. May be displayed on a display device 106 provided on an instrument panel 102 in a car.

特に、 目が離せない幼児や妊婦などが自動車に搭乗している際、 運転 者は走行時、 後方を振り返ることができない。 このため、 カメラ 3 0 3 0で撮影した映像をィンストウルメントパネル 1 0 2に設けられた表 示装置 1 0 6に表示させるようにするものであり、 運転席の近傍にカメ ラ 3 0 3 0の撮影を行なわせる操作部 (図示せず) が設けられており、 自動車室内の状況をィンストウルメントパネル 1 0 2に設けられた表 示装置 1 0 6に表示させる際は、 操作部を操作してカメラ 3 0 3 0で撮 影させて表示装置 1 0 6に表示されるようになっている。 また、 第 3 7 図では、 カメラ 3 0 3 0の撮影方向が後方になっているが、 撮影方向の 変更も可能となっている。 In particular, when an infant or pregnant woman who cannot keep an eye on the car is riding in a car, the driver cannot look back when driving. For this reason, the video taken by the camera 300 is displayed on the display device 106 provided on the instrument panel 102, and the camera 30 is located near the driver's seat. An operation unit (not shown) for taking a picture of the camera 30 is provided. When the status of the interior of the car is displayed on the display device 106 provided on the instrument panel 102, an operation is performed. By operating the unit, the image is taken by the camera 303 and displayed on the display device 106. Also, in FIG. 37, the shooting direction of the camera 3030 is backward, Changes are also possible.

従って、 上記のように構成したので本実施の形態 7は自動車室内の映 像を間近にある表示装置に表示させることができ、 装置の利用範囲が広 がり、 装置の利便性がさらに向上する。 実施の形態 8 .  Therefore, with the above-described configuration, the seventh embodiment can display an image in the vehicle cabin on a nearby display device, so that the range of use of the device is widened and the convenience of the device is further improved. Embodiment 8

次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 8に係る移動体用機器配設装置につい て第 4 0図〜第 4 2図を用いて説明する。  Next, a mobile device installation device according to another embodiment 8 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42. FIG.

実施の形態 1、 2では、 センタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0を移動さ せる際、 センターコンソールユニッ ト 2 0 0の前面部に設けられた操作 部 2 4 1、 2 4 2を操作するように説明したが、 本実施の形態 8では、 自動車内に設けられた各座席に着座している着座者を検出し、 着座して いる座席に対応した箇所への移動をさらに簡単に選択できるようにし たものである。  In the first and second embodiments, when the center console unit 200 is moved, the operation units 241, 242 provided on the front part of the center console unit 200 are operated. As described above, in the eighth embodiment, it is possible to detect a occupant seated in each seat provided in an automobile and to more easily select a movement to a location corresponding to the seated seat. It is a thing.

第 4 0図において、 4 0 0 1は自動車内に設けられた各座席に着座者 がいるか否かを検出する着座者検出手段であり、 この着座者検出手段 4 0 0 1は座席の略中央部に圧力センサや乗員カメラ等 (図示せず) が設 けられており、 着座者がいると圧力センサに押圧力がかかるため着座者 ありと検出されるものであり、 また、 乗員カメラで座席上を撮影して画 像解析を行なって着座者の有無を検出するものである。 4 0 0 2は着座 者検出手段 4 0 0 1が検出した結果に基づき、 各座席に着座者がいるか 否かを判断する着座者有無判断手段である。 この着座者有無判断手段 4 0 0 2は、 着座者検出手段 4 0 0 1が検出した結果から、 荷物を置いて いるだけの座席等は着座者なしと判断するものである。  In FIG. 40, reference numeral 4001 denotes occupant detection means for detecting whether or not there is a occupant in each seat provided in the automobile, and the occupant detection means 4001 is substantially at the center of the seat. A pressure sensor, an occupant camera, etc. (not shown) are installed in the section. If there is a occupant, the pressure sensor applies a pressing force, so that it is detected that there is a occupant. This is to detect the presence or absence of a seated person by photographing the upper part and performing image analysis. Reference numeral 4002 denotes occupant presence / absence determination means for determining whether or not each seat has a occupant based on the result detected by the occupant detection means 4001. The occupant presence / absence judging means 4002 judges from the result of the detection by the occupant detecting means 4001 that a seat or the like only holding luggage has no occupant.

4 0 0 3は着座者検出手段 4 0 0 1が着座者ありと検出した座席の 着座者の姿勢や体型等を判断するポジションセンサ (図示せず) が設け られたものであり、 4 0 0 4は着座者有無判断手段 4 0 0 2と着座者状 態判断手段 4 0 0 3とから出力された結果に基づき、 着座者がいる座席 を一覧表示するよう表示部 1 0 6、 2 2 0に対して表示制御を行なう表 示制御手段、 この表示制御手段 4 0 0 4の制御に基づき、 第 4 1図に示 すように表示部 1 0 6、 2 2 0に一覧表示し、 この内容を使用者が確認 して選択操作し、 この操作に基づき、 設定値選択手段 4 0 0 6は、 記憶 手段 4 0 0 7 (後述 る) に記憶された移動設定値から所定の設定値を 選択し、 この設定値を出力するものである。 4 0 0 7は第 1 2図に示し たように自動車室内に設けられた各座席 1 2 0、 1 3 0の位置それぞれ に、 車輪部 2 0 1が移動する方向及び距離と、 センタ一コンソールュニ ット 2 0 0に設けられた表示部 2 2 0をセンタ一コンソールュニット4003 is provided with a position sensor (not shown) for judging the posture, body shape, etc. of the occupant of the seat detected by the occupant detection means 4001 as having an occupant. 4004 displays a list of the seats where the occupants are present based on the results output from the occupant presence / absence determination means 4002 and the occupant state determination means 4003. Display control means for performing display control on the display sections 106, 220, and based on the control of the display control means 404, as shown in FIG. 41, the display sections 106, 2 A list is displayed on the display unit 20 and the user confirms the content and performs a selection operation. Based on this operation, the setting value selection unit 4006 moves the movement stored in the storage unit 4007 (described later). A predetermined set value is selected from the set values, and this set value is output. Reference numeral 4007 denotes the direction and distance in which the wheel unit 201 moves, the center and the console unit at the positions of the seats 120 and 130 provided in the car interior as shown in FIG. The display unit 220 provided in the unit 200 is connected to the center console unit.

2 0 0の上面から突出させるか否かの設定値と、 センターコンソールュ ニッ ト 2 0 0に設けられた操作部 2 3 0をセンタ一コンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0の上面から突出させるか否かの設定値とを対応させて記憶し た記憶手段である。 The set value of whether or not to protrude from the upper surface of 200, and whether or not the operation unit 230 provided on the center console unit 200 is to protrude from the upper surface of the center console unit 200. This storage means stores the set values in association with each other.

また、 4 0 0 8は設定値選択手段 4 0 0 6が出力された記憶手段 4 0 0 7から選択した移動設定値、 表示手段突出設定値としての表示部設定 値及び操作手段突出設定値としての操作部設定値に基づき、 センターコ ンソールュニット 2 0 0を移動設定値に応じた移動を行い、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 3 0を筐体部 2 1 0の上面から突出させるか筐体部 2 1 0内に収納させる移動制御手段であり、 4 0 0 9は移動制御手段 4 0 0 8が出力した制御信号に基づき、 センターコンソールュニット 2 0 0を 第 1図に示す A方向または B方向に移動させ、 表示部 2 2 0と操作部 2 Also, reference numeral 400 denotes a movement set value selected from the storage means 400 output from the set value selection means 400, a display section set value as a display means protrusion set value, and an operation means protrusion set value. The center console unit 200 is moved according to the movement set value based on the operation unit set value of the operation unit, and the display unit 220 and the operation unit 230 are protruded from the upper surface of the housing unit 210 or the housing unit 210 is moved. Movement control means to be accommodated in the body part 210, and reference numeral 409 designates the center console unit 200 in the direction A shown in FIG. 1 based on the control signal output from the movement control means 408. Or move it in direction B, and display 2 2 0 and operation 2

3 0とを筐体部 2 1 0の上面に突出させたり筐体部 2 1 0内に収納さ せる移動手段であり、 実施の形態 1で説明した構成と同様に移動手段 430 is a moving means that protrudes from the upper surface of the housing part 210 or is housed in the housing part 210. The moving means 4 is similar to the structure described in the first embodiment.

0 0 9は車輪部 2 0 1、 この車輪部 2 0 1の外周面に形成された嚙合部 2 0 2、車輪部 2 0 1に内蔵され駆動部(図示せず)、 レール部 1 1 0、 このレ一ル部 1 1 0の溝内に形成された係止部 1 1 1、 並びに、 表示部 2 2 0の駆動機構及び操作部 2 3 0の駆動機構とで構成されている。 なお、 4 0 0 5は着座者有無判断手段 4 0 0 2と着座者状態判断手段 4 0 0 3とから出力された結果に基づき、 自動車内に設けられたェアバ ッグ装置 (図示せず) の動作を制御させるエアバッグ制御手段であり、 このエアバッグ制御手段 4 0 0 5が制御対象とするエアバッグ装置は、 ァドバンスド ·エアバッグ装置という。 0 09 is a wheel portion 201, a joint portion formed on the outer peripheral surface of the wheel portion 201. 202, a drive unit (not shown) built in the wheel unit 201, a rail unit 110, a locking unit 111 formed in a groove of the rail unit 110, and It comprises a drive mechanism for the display section 220 and a drive mechanism for the operation section 230. Here, reference numeral 4005 denotes an airbag device (not shown) provided in the vehicle based on the results output from the occupant presence / absence determining means 4002 and the occupant state determining means 4003. The airbag device which is controlled by the airbag control device 400 is referred to as an advanced airbag device.

次に、 第 4 2図を用いて動作の流れについて説明する。  Next, the operation flow will be described with reference to FIG.

自動車のイダニッシヨンを O Nすると装置の動作が開始され (ステツ プ 4 2 0 0 ) 、 着座者検出手段 4 0 0 1で自動車内の各座席の着座者を 検出し (ステップ 4 2 0 1 ) 、 このステップ 4 2 0 1の処理後、 着座者 有無判断手段が着座者の有無を判断したか否かを判断し (ステップ 4 2 0 2 ) 、 このステップ 4 2 0 2で着座者有無を判断したと判断した場合 は、 表示制御手段 4 0 0 4が表示部 1 0 6、 2 2 0に着座者一覧を表示 させ (ステップ 4 2 0 3 ) 、 このステップ 4 2 0 3で表示された一覧表 示から使用者がどの座席対応でセンターコンソールュニッ 卜 2 0 0を 移動させるかの選択を行なったか否かを判断し (ステップ 4 2 0 4 ) 、 このステップ 4 2 0 4で選択されたと判断した場合は、 この選択に対応 した各設定値を設定値選択手段 4 0 0 6が記憶手段 4 0 0 7から選択 し、 この選択された設定値に基づき、 移動制御手段 4 0 0 8が移動手段 4 0 0 9を移動させる (ステップ 4 2 0 5 ) 。 このステップ 4 2 0 5の 処理の後、 移動が完了したか否かを判断し (ステップ 4 2 0 6 ) 、 ステ ップ 4 2 0 6で移動が完了したと判断した際は、 ステップ 4 2 0 1に戻 り、 処理を繰り返す。  When the automobile identification is turned on, the operation of the apparatus is started (step 420), and the occupant detection means 4001 detects the occupants of each seat in the automobile (step 4201). After the processing of step 4201, it is determined whether or not the occupant presence / absence determining means has determined the presence or absence of a occupant (step 4202). When it is determined, the display control means 400 displays the occupant list on the display sections 106 and 220 (step 4203), and displays the list displayed in step 4203. From this, it is determined whether or not the user has selected which seat should be used to move the center console unit 200 (step 420), and it is determined that the user has been selected in step 420. In this case, each set value corresponding to this selection is stored in the set value selection means 4006 from the storage means 40007. Then, based on the selected set value, the movement control means 408 moves the movement means 409 (step 425). After the processing in step 420, it is determined whether or not the movement has been completed (step 420), and if it is determined in step 420 that the movement has been completed, step 42 0 Return to 1 and repeat the process.

また、 ステップ 4 2 0 2で着座者の有無を判断していないと判断した 場合は、 再度ステップ 4 2 0 1に戻り、 処理を繰り返す。 In addition, it is determined that the presence or absence of a seated person has not been determined in step 402. In this case, return to step 4201 again and repeat the processing.

また、 ステップ 4 2 0 2で着座者有無の判断を行なったと判断した場 合、 ステップ 4 2 0 3に進むとともに、 エアバッグ制御手段 4 0 0 5に 着座者有無判断手段の判断結果を出力してエアバッグ装置の動作待機 状態となる (ステップ 4 2 0 7 ) 。 この後、 イダニッシヨンが O F Fさ れたか否かを判断し (ステップ 4 2 0 8 ) 、 このステップ 4 2 0 8でィ グニッションが〇 F Fされたと判断した場合は、 エアバッグ装置の動作 制御が終了する (ステップ 4 2 0 9 ) 。  If it is determined that the presence or absence of a occupant has been determined in step 402, the process proceeds to step 423, and the determination result of the presence / absence determination means is output to the airbag control means 405. As a result, the operation of the airbag apparatus is in a standby state (step 4207). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the ignition has been turned off (step 408). If it is determined in this step 408 that the ignition has been turned off, the operation control of the airbag device ends. (Step 4209).

次に、 ステップ 4 2 0 4で選択操作がないと設定値選択手段 4 0 0 6 が判断した場合は、 再度、 ステップ 4 2 0 3に戻り、 処理を繰り返す。 また、 ステップ 4 2 0 6でセンタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0の移動 が完了していないと判断した場合は、 ステップ 4 2 0 5に戻り、 処理を 繰り返す。  Next, when the setting value selection means 4006 determines that there is no selection operation in step 4204, the process returns to step 4203 again and repeats the processing. If it is determined in step 420 that the movement of the center console unit 200 has not been completed, the process returns to step 420 and repeats the processing.

また、 ステップ 4 2 0 8でイダ二ッション O F Fされていないと判断 した場合は、 再度ステップ 4 2 0 8に戻り、 エアバッグ装置の動作待機 状態を継続させる。  If it is determined in step 408 that the induction OFF has not been performed, the flow returns to step 428 again to continue the operation standby state of the airbag device.

従って、 上記のようにエアバッグ装置に用いる着座者情報を移動体用 機器配設装置の移動設定に有効利用できるように構成したため、 使用者 がセンタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0を移動する際の煩わしい操作を 最低限の操作のみにできるので、 装置の操作性、 及び装置の利便性がさ らに向上する。 実施の形態 9 .  Therefore, as described above, since the occupant information used for the airbag device is configured to be effectively used for the movement setting of the mobile device arrangement device, when the user moves between the center unit 200 and the center unit 200. Since the troublesome operation can be reduced to the minimum operation, the operability of the device and the convenience of the device are further improved. Embodiment 9

次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 9に係る移動体用情報処理装置を用い た移動体用機器配設装置について第 4 3図〜第 4 5図を用いて説明す る。 第 4 3図は移動体用情報処理装置にナビゲーション装置を備えた構 成を示す構成図、 第 4 4図は第 4 3図の装置に表示される表示例を示し た説明図、 第 4 5図は第 4 3図に示す移動体用情報処理装置の動作の流 れを示すフローチャートである。 Next, a mobile device arrangement device using a mobile object information processing device according to Embodiment 9 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45. FIG. Fig. 43 shows a configuration in which a navigation device is provided in the mobile information processing device. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a display example displayed on the device of FIG. 43, and FIG. 45 is a flow chart of the operation of the information processing device for a mobile object shown in FIG. It is a flowchart showing this.

第 4 3図において、 レシート等の情報源を撮像手段としてのカメラ 1 0 8や、 カメラ 2 5 0で取り込み、 インストウルメン卜パネル 1 0 2に 設けられた表示部 1 0 6やセンターコンソールュニッ ト 2 0 0に設け られた表示部 2 2 0に表示されるものであり、 4 3 0 1はカメラ 1 0 8, 2 5 0で撮影され、 出力された可視情報と後述する記憶手段に記憶され たカメラ 1 0 8、 2 5 0で撮影された可視情報を解析するための可視情 報が示された辞書情報とを比較して解析する解析手段、 4 3 0 2は解析 手段 4 3 0 1がカメラ 1 0 8、 2 5 0で撮影した可視情報の内容を解析 する際に比較対象とする可視情報としての辞書情報を記憶した記憶手 段であり、 この記憶手段 4 3 0 1には、 実施の形態 1でも説明したよう に、 図形や記号、 アルファベットやひらがな、 かたかな、 漢字、 数字等 の文字を認識する上で必要な辞書情報を記憶している。  In FIG. 43, an information source such as a receipt is captured by a camera 108 or a camera 250 as an imaging means, and a display unit 106 and a center console unit provided on an instrument panel 102 are provided. This is displayed on the display unit 220 provided in the unit 200, and the reference numeral 430 1 is taken by the cameras 108 and 250, and is output to the visible information and stored in the storage means described later. Analysis means for comparing the stored visual information taken by the cameras 108 and 250 with the dictionary information indicating the visible information for analyzing the visual information. Reference numeral 01 denotes a storage means for storing dictionary information as visible information to be compared when analyzing the contents of the visible information captured by the cameras 108 and 250. As described in Embodiment 1, figures, symbols, alphabets, hiragana, katakana, and kan , Stores the dictionary information necessary to recognize the character of such numbers.

また、 4 3 0 3は表示部 1 0 6や表示部 2 2 0に自車の現在位置や現 在位置周辺の地図情報等を表示させるナビゲーシヨン手段であり、 この ナピゲーション手段 4 3 0 3は目的地の設定や、 この目的地までの経路 探索、 経路誘導等が行なえるものである。 4 3 0 4はナビゲーシヨン手 段 4 3 0 3に対して所定の操作を行なう操作手段であり、 この操作手段4 3 0 4は目的地や経路探索等の設定を決定する時などに操作するも のである。  Reference numeral 4303 denotes navigation means for displaying the current position of the vehicle and map information around the current position on the display unit 106 and the display unit 220, and the navigation means 4303 is It can set destinations, search for routes to these destinations, and provide route guidance. Reference numeral 4304 denotes an operation means for performing a predetermined operation on the navigation means 4303, and this operation means 4304 is operated when determining settings such as a destination and a route search. It is a thing.

4 3 0 5は解析手段 4 3 0 1の解析結果とナビゲーション手段 4 3 0 3からの現在位置情報等とに基づき、 表示部 1 0 6や表示部 2 2 0に 表示させる表示制御手段であり、 この表示制御手段 4 3 0 5の表示制御 信号はナビゲ一ション手段 4 3 0 3に出力され、 ナビゲーション手段 4 3 0 3では、 この表示制御信号を受けて解析手段 4 3 0 1が解析した結 果を目的地設定や経路探索、 経路誘導の設定等に反映させて再度、 表示 制御手段 4 3 0 5に出力し、 表示部 1 0 6や表示部 2 2 0に表示させる < 実施の形態 1で説明した第 2 0図を用いて説明すると、 例えば、 気に 入った店のレシートを持っていて、 この店までの経路案内をナビゲ一シ ョン手段 4 3 0 3にさせる場合、 レシートの内容をカメラ 1 2 8や 2 5 0で読み込ませて、解析手段 4 3 0 1にて文字解析等を行なう。 この時、 レシートには 2 0 0 2に示すように 「東京都立川市一番町 6丁目」 とい う住所が記載されていることから、 この住所データをナビゲ一ション手 段 4 3 0 3が目的地と設定するか否かを使用者に確認させる。 この際の 表示部 1 0 6や表示部 2 2 0の表示例が第 4 4図に示すとおりであり、 ここで、 「Y E S」 を選択するとレシートに記載していた住所が目的地 として設定され、 使用者の住所入力等の操作なしで目的地の設定や、 こ の目的地設定後にこの目的地までの経路探索、 経路誘導を行なわせるこ とができるものである。 4305 is a display control means for displaying on the display section 106 or the display section 220 based on the analysis result of the analysis means 4301 and the current position information from the navigation means 4303. The display control signal of the display control means 4305 is output to the navigation means 4303, and At 303, the display control signal is received, and the result analyzed by the analyzing means 4301 is reflected on the destination setting, route search, route guidance setting, etc., and is again applied to the display controlling means 4305. Output it and display it on the display unit 106 or the display unit 220 <Using FIG. 20 described in the first embodiment, for example, if you have a receipt of a store that you like, When the route guidance to the store is to be provided by the navigation means 4303, the contents of the receipt are read by the camera 128 and 250, and the character analysis is performed by the analysis means 4301. . At this time, as shown in the receipt, the address "200, Ichibancho, Tachikawa-shi, Tokyo" is described in the receipt, so the navigation means 4 330 The user is asked whether to set the destination. At this time, the display examples of the display unit 106 and the display unit 220 are as shown in FIG. 44, and if "YES" is selected, the address described on the receipt is set as the destination. In addition, it is possible to set a destination without a user inputting an address or the like, and to perform a route search and a route guidance to the destination after the destination is set.

次に、 第 4 5図を用いて動作の流れについて説明する。  Next, the flow of the operation will be described with reference to FIG.

イダ二ッションが O Nされると装置の動作が開始され (ステップ 4 5 0 0 ) 、 カメラ 1 2 8、 2 5 0で可視情報であるレシートの文字情報が 読み込まれた否か判断し (ステップ 2 1 0 2 ) 、 読み込まれたと判断し た場合は、 この読み込まれた文字情報が記憶手段 4 3 0 2に記憶されて いるどの文字情報に該当しているかを解析手段 4 3 0 1が解析する (ス テツプ 2 1 0 2 ) 。 このステップ 2 1 0 2で解析手段 4 3 0 1は解析し た内容がナビゲ一ション手段 4 3 0 3で用いられる関連情報か否かを 判断し (ステップ 4 5 0 1 ) 、 このステップ 4 5 0 1でナビゲーション 手段 4 3 0 3に関連する情報と判断した場合は、 ナビゲーシヨン手段 4 3 0 3の設定を行なう設定機能を表示する (ステップ 4 5 0 2 ) 。 この ステップ 4 5 0 2で表示される表示例は第 4 4図に示すものである。 次に、 ステップ 4 5 0 2で表示した内容に対して選択操作がなされた か否かをナビゲーション手段 4 3 0 3が判断する(ステップ 4 5 0 3 )。 この選択操作とは、 第 4 4図に示すような表示の際、 「Y E S」 か 「N 〇」 を選択することを示している。 When the induction is turned on, the operation of the apparatus starts (step 450), and it is determined whether or not the camera 128, 250 has read the receipt character information as visible information (step 2). 10 2) If it is determined that the character information has been read, the analysis means 4301 analyzes which character information stored in the storage means 4302 corresponds to the read character information. (Step 2102). In step 2102, the analyzing means 4301 determines whether or not the analyzed content is related information used in the navigation means 4303 (step 4501). If it is determined in step 01 that the information is related to the navigation means 4303, a setting function for setting the navigation means 4303 is displayed (step 4502). this The display example displayed in step 4502 is shown in FIG. Next, the navigation means 4303 determines whether or not a selection operation has been performed on the content displayed in step 4502 (step 4503). This selection operation indicates that “YES” or “N〇” is selected in the display as shown in FIG.

このステップ 4 5 0 3で選択操作されたと判断した場合は、 ナピゲ一 ション手段 4 3 0 3が設定動作を行なう (ステップ 4 5 0 4 ) 。 第 4 4 図に示す内容であれば目的地としての設定動作を行なう。  If it is determined in step 4503 that the selection operation has been performed, the navigation means 4303 performs a setting operation (step 4504). If the contents are as shown in Fig. 44, the destination is set.

次に、 ステップ 4 5 0 4での設定動作した内容を盛り込んだ内容の表 示を表示制御手段 4 3 0 5が表示部 1 0 6や表示部 2 2 0に対して表 示させる (ステップ 4 5 0 5 ) 。 このステップ 4 5 0 5の処理後、 ステ ップ 2 1 0 1に戻り、 以下、 処理を繰り返し行なう。  Next, the display control means 4305 causes the display section 106 and the display section 220 to display a display of the content including the content set in Step 4504 (Step 4). 505). After the processing in step 4505, the process returns to step 2101, and the processing is repeated thereafter.

また、 ステップ 2 1 0 1で可視情報が読み込まれていないと判断した 場合は、 再度ステップ 2 1 0 1に戻り、 可視情報の読み込みが完了する まで繰り返す。  If it is determined in step 211 that the visible information has not been read, the process returns to step 211 again and repeats until the reading of the visible information is completed.

また、 ステツプ 4 5 0 1でナビゲーション手段 4 3 0 3がナビゲ一シ ヨン手段 4 3 0 3の設定値に関連する文字情報ではないと判断した場 合は、 第 2 1図に示すステップ 2 1 0 0に進む (ステップ 4 5 0 6 ) 。 また、 ステップ 4 5 0 3で選択操作されていないと判断した場合は、 再度ステップ 4 5 0 3に戻り、 処理を繰り返す。  If it is determined in step 4501 that the navigation means 4303 is not character information related to the setting value of the navigation means 4303, the processing proceeds to step 21 shown in FIG. Proceed to 0 0 (step 4506). If it is determined in step 4503 that the selection operation has not been performed, the flow returns to step 4503 again, and the processing is repeated.

従って、 上記のようにレシ一ト等の可視情報からナビゲ一ション機能 に関連する情報を解析し、 選択操作を簡単に行ないやすくしたので、 ナ ビゲ一シヨンの設定操作を極めて簡素化でき、 使用者の利便性及び装置 の操作性が向上する。 実施の形態 1 0 · 次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 1 0に係る移動体用情報処理装置につ いて説明する。 Therefore, as described above, the information related to the navigation function is analyzed from the visible information such as the receipt, and the selection operation is easily performed, so that the operation for setting the navigation can be extremely simplified. The convenience for the user and the operability of the device are improved. Embodiment 10 Next, a moving object information processing apparatus according to another embodiment 10 of the present invention will be described.

上記した実施の形態 9は、 好印象だった店のレシ一卜や地図等を持つ ていれば、 その店の位置を自動車に設置されたナビゲーション装置にメ モリして、 将来のドライブ時に手軽に利用できるのでしたものを説明し たが、 ドライブ時に支払った費用の計算等も行なえるようにしてもよい c 即ち、 第 2 2図に示すレシートの金額等を集計し、 品目の内訳やそれ らに支払った費用を一覧表示してもよく、 このように構成することによ り、 家計簿代わりに利用することができ、 装置の使用範囲が広がり、 使 用対象者の性別や年齢層も広げられるという効果が得られる。 実施の形態 1 1 . In the ninth embodiment described above, if the store has a good impression, such as a store receipt or a map, the position of the store is stored in the navigation device installed in the car, and is easily stored in the future when driving. Although it was explained that it could be used, it may be possible to calculate the expenses paid during driving c, that is, the amount of receipts etc. shown in Fig. 22 are aggregated, the breakdown of items and those May be displayed in a list, and this configuration can be used as a household account book, expanding the range of use of the device, and expanding the gender and age group of the target users Is obtained. Embodiment 11 1.

次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 1 1に係る移動体用機器配設装置につ いて、 説明する。  Next, a mobile device installation device according to another embodiment 11 of the present invention will be described.

上記した実施の形態 1、 2では、 使用者の操作によって自動的にセン 夕一コンソールュニット 2 0 0、 2 2 0 0を移動させることを説明した が、 自動車の動力源をオフ、 即ち、 イダニッシヨンスィッチをオフした 際に、 センタ一コンソールュニッ卜 2 0 0、 2 2 0 0を予め設定された 位置、 即ち、 デフォルト位置に自動的に戻るよう移動させるように構成 しても良い。  In the first and second embodiments described above, the console units 200 and 220 are automatically moved by the user's operation, but the power source of the vehicle is turned off, that is, When the identification switch is turned off, the center consoles 200 and 220 may be moved to return to a preset position, that is, a default position automatically.

従って、 上記のように構成したことにより、 予め設定された設定位置 は使用者が使用しゃすい位置であることから、 センターコンソールュニ ット 2 0 0、 2 2 0 0の移動によって変更された位置を自動車のイダ二 ッシヨンをオフする際にリセッ卜し、 デフォルト位置に自動的に移動さ せることができ、 使用者が搭乗する度にセンターコンソールユニット 2 0 0、 2 2 0 0の移動を余儀なくされることなく、 使用者の利便性が向 上する。 実施の形態 1 2 . Therefore, with the above-described configuration, the preset position is a position where the user can use lightly, and thus the position is changed by moving the center console units 200 and 220. The position can be reset when the car's induction is turned off and automatically moved to the default position, and the center console unit 200, 220 can be moved each time a user gets on the vehicle. User's convenience without being forced Up. Embodiment 1 2.

次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 1 2に係る移動体用機器配設装置につ いて、 説明する。  Next, a mobile device installation device according to another embodiment 12 of the present invention will be described.

上記した実施の形態 1 1では、 自動車の動力源をオフ、 即ち、 イダ二 ッシヨンスィツチをオフした際に、 センタ一コンソールュニット 2 0 0 , 2 2 0 0を予め設定された位置、 即ち、 デフォルト位置に自動的に戻る よう移動させるように構成することを説明したが、 デフオル卜位置を自 動車の使用頻度が一番高い搭乗者である運転手の着座席、 即ち、 運転席 と助手席との間に挟まれた位置に設定しておいても良い。  In the above-described embodiment 11, when the power source of the vehicle is turned off, that is, when the induction switch is turned off, the center console unit 200, 220 is set at a preset position, that is, the default position. Although it has been described that the vehicle is configured to be moved back to the position automatically, the default position is the seating position of the driver who uses the vehicle most frequently, that is, the driver's seat and the passenger's seat. It may be set at a position sandwiched between them.

従って、 自動車の使用頻度が最も高い運転手の座席に対応する位置を デフォルト位置として予め設定しておくため、 運転手の利便性が向上す る。 実施の形態 1 3 .  Therefore, since the position corresponding to the driver's most frequently used seat is preset as the default position, the convenience of the driver is improved. Embodiment 1 3.

次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 1 3に係る移動体用機器配設装置につ いて、 説明する。  Next, a mobile device arrangement device according to another embodiment 13 of the present invention will be described.

上記した実施の形態 1〜 1 2では、 インストウルメントパネル 1 0 2 に設けられた表示部 1 0 6の情報と、 センターコンソールユニット 2 0 0、 2 2 0 0に設けられた表示部 2 2 0、 表示部 2 2 5 0、 表示ュニッ 卜 3 0 0 0に設けられた表示部 3 0 2 0の情報との関係について説明 していなかったが、 これらの表示部に送信部と受信部を設けても良い。 即ち、 一方の表示部で表示している内容を互いの送受信部を用いて他 方の表示部に表示するようにしてもよく、 自動車内に多くの搭乗者がい る際など、 全員で同じ情報を共有できため、 装置の使用範囲を広げるこ とができ、 使用者の利便性が向上する。 In Embodiments 1 to 12 described above, the information on the display unit 106 provided on the instrument panel 102 and the display unit 22 provided on the center console units 200 and 200 are provided. 0, display unit 250, and display unit 3000, the relationship with the information of the display unit 320 provided was not described. May be provided. In other words, the content displayed on one display unit may be displayed on the other display unit using the transmission / reception unit of each other, and the same information may be used by all members, for example, when there are many passengers in the car. Can be used to expand the range of use of the equipment. The convenience of the user is improved.

なお、 上記送受信部は、 赤外線を用いたものや、 B l u e t o o t h の技術などを用いてもよい。 実施の形態 14.  Note that the transmitting and receiving unit may use an infrared ray, a Bluetooth technology, or the like. Embodiment 14.

次に、 本発明の他の実施の形態 14に係る移動体用機器配設装置につ いて、 説明する。  Next, a mobile device arrangement device according to another embodiment 14 of the present invention will be described.

上記した実施の形態 1、 2では、センタ一コンソールュニット 200、 2200の設定値としてセンターコンソールュニッ卜 2 00、 22 00 の移動設定値と、 表示部の突出設定値と、 操作部の突出設定値の 3種類 の設定値を記憶するように説明していたが、 各設定値それぞれ一種類の みの設定値だけで構成してもよく、 記憶手段のメモリ容量を極力小さく できる上、 装置の利便性も得ることができる。 産業上の利用可能性  In the first and second embodiments, the set values of the center console units 200 and 2200 are set as the movement values of the center console units 200 and 2200, the set values of the display unit, and the set values of the operation unit. Although it has been described that three types of set values are stored, each set value may be configured with only one type of set value, and the memory capacity of the storage means can be reduced as much as possible. Can also be obtained. Industrial applicability

以上のように、 この発明にかかる移動体用表示装置は、 自動車等の移 動体において、 車室内に後方視界を遮る状態であっても、 後席の搭乗者 の利便性をそのままにして、 運転者が常時、 後方視界を良好にできる移 動体用の表示装置として用いるのに適している。  As described above, the display device for a mobile object according to the present invention can be used for driving a mobile object such as an automobile while maintaining the convenience of the passenger in the rear seat even when the rear view is blocked in the vehicle interior. It is suitable for use as a display device for a mobile object that can always provide a good rear view.

Claims

請求の範囲 The scope of the claims 1 . 移動体に設けられ、 映像を撮影する撮像手段、 上記移動体の運転席 近傍に設けられ、 上記移動体の後方映像を表示する第 1表示手段、 収納 可能に形成され、 上記移動体内で上記第 1表示手段の設置位置より後方 に設けられるとともに、 所望の映像を表示する第 2表示手段、 この第 2 表示手段の収納状態を判断する収納状態判断手段、 この収納状態判断手 段が上記第 2表示手段は収納されていないと判断した場合のみ、 上記第 1表示手段は上記撮像手段が撮影した映像を表示させるように表示制 御を行う表示制御手段を備えたことを特徴とする移動体用表示装置。 1. Imaging means provided on the moving body to capture an image, first display means provided near the driver's seat of the moving body to display an image behind the moving body, formed so as to be stowable, and provided inside the moving body. The second display means is provided behind the installation position of the first display means and displays a desired image. The storage state determination means for determining the storage state of the second display means. Only when it is determined that the second display means is not housed, the first display means includes display control means for performing display control so as to display the image captured by the imaging means. Body display device. 2 . 撮像手段は、 移動体の後方映像を撮影し、 表示制御手段は上記撮影 手段が撮影した後方映像を第 1表示手段に表示させることを特徴とす る請求項 1に記載の移動体用表示装置。 2. The moving object according to claim 1, wherein the imaging means captures a rear image of the moving object, and the display control means displays the rear image photographed by the photographing means on the first display means. Display device. 3 . 第 1表示手段は、 鏡部と導通すると表示される表示部とのそれぞれ を有し、 表示制御手段は、 収納状態判断手段の判断により第 2表示手段 が収納されていると判断した場合は、 表示制御動作を行なわずに上記第 1表示手段に設けた上記鏡部にて後方映像を写し出すようにし、 上記第 2表示手段が収納されていないと判断した場合は、 表示制御動作を行い、 上記第 1表示手段に設けた上記表示部が導通され、 この表示部にて撮像 手段が撮影した映像を表示するようにしたことを特徴とする請求項 1 に記載の移動体用表示装置。 3. The first display unit has a display unit that is displayed when the first display unit is electrically connected to the mirror unit, and the display control unit determines that the second display unit is stored by the storage state determination unit. Does not perform the display control operation, so that the rear image is projected by the mirror provided in the first display means, and when it is determined that the second display means is not housed, the display control operation is performed. The display device for a mobile object according to claim 1, wherein the display unit provided in the first display unit is turned on, and an image captured by the imaging unit is displayed on the display unit. 4 . 第 2表示手段を折り畳み可能に移動体の天井部に設け、 収納状態判 断手段は、 上記第 2表示手段が上記天井部に略平行に折り畳まれた際は, 収納されたと判断し、 上記第 2表示手段が上記天井部から下方に突出す る状態の際は、 収納されていないと判断することを特徴とする請求項 3 に記載の移動体用表示装置。 4. A second display means is provided on the ceiling of the movable body so that it can be folded, The disconnecting means determines that the second display means is stored when the second display means is folded substantially parallel to the ceiling, and stores the storage means when the second display means protrudes downward from the ceiling. 4. The display device for a moving object according to claim 3, wherein it is determined that the operation has not been performed. 5 . 撮像手段と第 2表示手段とを一体に形成し、 この一体形成したュニ ッ トを移動体内の第 1表示手段より後方の天井部に設けたことを特徴 とする請求項 4に記載の移動体用表示装置。 5. The imaging unit and the second display unit are integrally formed, and the integrally formed unit is provided on a ceiling portion behind the first display unit in the moving body. Mobile display device. 6 . 映像を撮影する撮像手段、 移動体の運転席近傍に設けられ、 上記移 動体の後方映像を表示する第 1表示手段、 収納可能に形成され、 上記移 動体内で上記第 1表示手段の設置位置より後方に設けられるとともに、 所望の映像を表示する第 2表示手段、 上記撮像手段に対し、 映像を撮像 させるとともに、 この映像を出力するよう指令する指令手段、 この指令 手段からの指令に基づき、 上記撮像手段が映像を撮像し、 この映像を出 力するよう動作制御を行う撮影制御手段、 この撮影制御手段が出力した 映像情報を送信する送信手段、 この送信手段が送信した映像情報を受信 する受信手段、 この受信手段が受信した映像情報を表示する第 3表示手 段を備えた移動体用表示装置。 6. Imaging means for photographing an image, first display means provided near the driver's seat of the moving body to display an image behind the moving body, and formed so as to be stowable, wherein the first display means is provided in the moving body. A second display unit that is provided behind the installation position and displays a desired video; a command unit that causes the imaging unit to capture a video and outputs the video; and a command from the command unit. A photographing control unit for performing operation control so that the photographing unit captures a video and outputting the video, a transmitting unit for transmitting the video information output by the capturing control unit, and a video information transmitted by the transmitting unit. A display device for a mobile object, comprising: receiving means for receiving; and a third display means for displaying video information received by the receiving means. 7 . 撮像手段は 3 6 0 ° 回動可能に形成するとともに、 指令に基づいて 上記撮像手段の撮影方向を変更する撮影方向変更手段を設け、 移動体の 周辺映像及び移動体内の映像を撮影可能にしたことを特徴とする請求 項 6に記載の移動体用表示装置。 7. The imaging means is formed so as to be rotatable by 360 °, and provided with a shooting direction changing means for changing the shooting direction of the imaging means based on a command, so that images around the moving body and images inside the moving body can be shot. The display device for a mobile object according to claim 6, wherein 8 . 移動体外に指令手段と受信手段と第 3表示手段とを有した通信手段 を設けたことを特徴とする請求項 7に記載の移動体用表示装置。 8. Communication means having command means, receiving means, and third display means outside the moving body 8. The display device for a moving object according to claim 7, wherein a display device is provided. 9 . 撮像手段と第 2表示手段とを一体に形成し、 この一体形成したュニ ットを移動体内の第 1表示手段より後方の天井部に設けたことを特徴 とする請求項 7に記載の移動体用表示装置。 9. The imaging unit and the second display unit are integrally formed, and the integrally formed unit is provided on a ceiling portion behind the first display unit in the moving body. Mobile display device.
PCT/JP2001/004434 2001-05-28 2001-05-28 Display for moving body Ceased WO2002096714A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2002520799A JP4232462B2 (en) 2001-05-28 2001-05-28 Display device for moving body
PCT/JP2001/004434 WO2002096714A1 (en) 2001-05-28 2001-05-28 Display for moving body

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2001/004434 WO2002096714A1 (en) 2001-05-28 2001-05-28 Display for moving body

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2002096714A1 true WO2002096714A1 (en) 2002-12-05

Family

ID=11737357

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2001/004434 Ceased WO2002096714A1 (en) 2001-05-28 2001-05-28 Display for moving body

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JP4232462B2 (en)
WO (1) WO2002096714A1 (en)

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2012060215A1 (en) * 2010-11-02 2012-05-10 アイシン精機株式会社 In-vehicle camera device
JP2013163407A (en) * 2012-02-09 2013-08-22 Nec Access Technica Ltd Display device, display device control method, and program
JP2016128320A (en) * 2012-06-21 2016-07-14 ビステオン グローバル テクノロジーズ インコーポレイテッド Mobile device wireless camera integration with vehicle
JP2019006331A (en) * 2017-06-28 2019-01-17 矢崎総業株式会社 Vehicle roof mounting system
JP2019032490A (en) * 2017-08-09 2019-02-28 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display and vehicle rearview mirror
JP2019061329A (en) * 2017-09-25 2019-04-18 矢崎総業株式会社 Monitoring system
US10717399B2 (en) 2018-09-05 2020-07-21 Yazaki Corporation Wire harness
JP2023088182A (en) * 2021-12-14 2023-06-26 トヨタ自動車株式会社 Electronic mirror device

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
HK1219144A1 (en) * 2013-06-08 2017-03-24 苹果公司 Device, method, and graphical user interface for synchronizing two or more displays

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0471939A (en) * 1990-07-10 1992-03-06 Nec Home Electron Ltd Vehicle rear view confirmation system
JPH1178693A (en) * 1997-09-16 1999-03-23 Niles Parts Co Ltd Monitor device for vehicle
JPH11129815A (en) * 1997-10-28 1999-05-18 Nissan Motor Co Ltd Rear view confirmation device for vehicles
JPH11291817A (en) * 1998-04-06 1999-10-26 Nissan Motor Co Ltd Rear confirmation device

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0471939A (en) * 1990-07-10 1992-03-06 Nec Home Electron Ltd Vehicle rear view confirmation system
JPH1178693A (en) * 1997-09-16 1999-03-23 Niles Parts Co Ltd Monitor device for vehicle
JPH11129815A (en) * 1997-10-28 1999-05-18 Nissan Motor Co Ltd Rear view confirmation device for vehicles
JPH11291817A (en) * 1998-04-06 1999-10-26 Nissan Motor Co Ltd Rear confirmation device

Cited By (10)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2012060215A1 (en) * 2010-11-02 2012-05-10 アイシン精機株式会社 In-vehicle camera device
JP2013163407A (en) * 2012-02-09 2013-08-22 Nec Access Technica Ltd Display device, display device control method, and program
JP2016128320A (en) * 2012-06-21 2016-07-14 ビステオン グローバル テクノロジーズ インコーポレイテッド Mobile device wireless camera integration with vehicle
JP2019006331A (en) * 2017-06-28 2019-01-17 矢崎総業株式会社 Vehicle roof mounting system
JP2019032490A (en) * 2017-08-09 2019-02-28 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display and vehicle rearview mirror
JP7132700B2 (en) 2017-08-09 2022-09-07 株式会社ジャパンディスプレイ Display device and vehicle room mirror
JP2019061329A (en) * 2017-09-25 2019-04-18 矢崎総業株式会社 Monitoring system
US10949688B2 (en) 2017-09-25 2021-03-16 Yazaki Corporation Monitoring system for person in a vehicle
US10717399B2 (en) 2018-09-05 2020-07-21 Yazaki Corporation Wire harness
JP2023088182A (en) * 2021-12-14 2023-06-26 トヨタ自動車株式会社 Electronic mirror device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2002096714A1 (en) 2004-09-09
JP4232462B2 (en) 2009-03-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP4270881B2 (en) Mobile device arrangement device
US11348374B2 (en) Vehicular driver monitoring system
US8700309B2 (en) Multiple visual display device and vehicle-mounted navigation system
US7053866B1 (en) Portable adaptor and software for use with a heads-up display unit
CN105751900B (en) vehicle with display
CN105751984A (en) Display Apparatus For Vehicle And Vehicle Having The Display Apparatus
CN117279804A (en) Rotating vehicle center information display with fixed buttons and touch bar
US7826934B1 (en) Theft and tamper resistant vehicle interior
US20020140687A1 (en) In-vehicle display apparatus
US20100077437A1 (en) Vehicle entertainment system with video surround
JP2008280037A (en) Mobile display device
WO2002096714A1 (en) Display for moving body
WO2007106092A1 (en) Portable adaptor and software for use with a heads-up display unit
WO2002096713A1 (en) Information processor for moving body
JP7737276B2 (en) Mirror position registration control device
JP4760245B2 (en) Vehicle information display device
JP2000309247A (en) In-dashboard monitor for vehicle
KR20210027646A (en) Beam projector for vehicle
JP4242791B2 (en) In-vehicle image information processing device
JP2004034795A (en) On-vehicle appliance
CN118953013A (en) Vehicle display components and vehicles
JP2006273255A (en) Rear confirmation monitoring system, in-vehicle monitor device, small monitor device and automobile
NZ571990A (en) Portable adaptor and software for use with a heads-up display unit

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2002520799

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

Format of ref document f/p: F

Ref country code: JP

Ref document number: 2002 520799

Kind code of ref document: A

Format of ref document f/p: F

AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): JP US

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE TR

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase